BS EN 60204‑1:2018 BSI Standards Publication Safety of machinery - Electrical equipment of machines Part 1: General requirements http://www.china-gauges.com/ BS EN 60204‑1:2018 BRITISH STANDARD National foreword This British Standard is the UK implementation of EN 60204‑1:2018. It is derived from IEC 60204‑1:2016. It supersedes BS EN 60204‑1:2006+A1:2009, which is withdrawn. The CENELEC common modifications have been implemented at the appropriate places in the text. The start and finish o f each common modification is indicated in the text by tags . The UK participation in its preparation was entrusted to Technical Committee MCE/3, Sa feguarding o f machinery. A list o f organizations represented on this committee can be obtained on request to its secretary. This publication does not purport to include all the necessary provisions o f a contract. Users are responsible for its correct application. © The British Standards Institution 2018 Published by BSI Standards Limited 2018 ISBN 978 0 580 73746 6 ICS 31.020; 29.020; 13.110 Compliance with a British Standard cannot confer immunity from legal obligations. This British Standard was published under the authority o f the Standards Policy and Strategy Committee on 30 September 2018. Amendments/corrigenda issued since publication Date Text affected http://www.china-gauges.com/ EUROPEAN STANDARD NORME EUROPÉENNE EUROPÄISCHE NORM EN 60204-1 BS EN 60204‑1:2018 September 201 8 ICS 1 3.1 1 0; 29.020 Supersedes EN 60204-1 :2006 English Version Safety of machinery - Electrical equipment of machines Part 1 : General requirements (IEC 60204-1 :201 6 , modified) Sécurité des machines - Équipement électrique des machines - Partie 1 : Exigences générales (IEC 60204-1 :201 6 , modifiée) Sicherheit von Maschinen - Elektrische Ausrüstung von Maschinen - Teil 1 : Allgemeine Anforderungen (IEC 60204-1 :201 6 , modifiziert) This European Standard was approved by CENELEC on 201 8-03-1 9. CENELEC members are bound to comply with the CEN/CENELEC Internal Regulations which stipulate the conditions for giving this European Standard the status of a national standard without any alteration. Up-to-date lists and bibliographical references concerning such national standards may be obtained on application to the CEN-CENELEC Management Centre or to any CENELEC member. This European Standard exists in three official versions (English, French, German). A version in any other language made by translation under the responsibility of a CENELEC member into its own language and notified to the CEN-CENELEC Management Centre has the same status as the official versions. CENELEC members are the national electrotechnical committees of Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Croatia, Cyprus, the Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, Former Yugoslav Republic of Macedonia, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, the Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Serbia, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Turkey and the United Kingdom. http://www.china-gauges.com/ European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization Comité Européen de Normalisation Electrotechnique Europäisches Komitee für Elektrotechnische Normung CEN-CENELEC Management Centre: Rue de la Science 23, B-1 040 Brussels © 201 8 CENELEC All rights of exploitation in any form and by any means reserved worldwide for CENELEC Members. Ref. No. EN 60204-1 :201 8 E BS EN 60204‑1:2018 EN 60204-1 :201 8 (E) European foreword This document (EN 60204-1 :201 8) consists of the text of IEC 60204-1 :201 6, prepared by IEC/TC 44 "Safety of machinery - Electrotechnical aspects", together with the common modifications prepared by CLC/TC 44X "Safety of machinery: electrotechnical aspects". The following dates are fixed: • • latest date by which this document has to be (dop) implemented at national level by publication of an identical national standard or by endorsement latest date by which the national standards (dow) conflicting with this document have to be withdrawn 201 9-03-1 4 2021 -09-1 4 This document supersedes EN 60204-1 :2006. Attention is drawn to the possibility that some of the elements of this document may be the subject of patent rights. CENELEC shall not be held responsible for identifying any or all such patent rights. Clauses, subclauses, notes, tables, figures and annexes which are additional to those in IEC 60204-1 :201 6 are prefixed “Z”. This document has been prepared under a mandate given to CENELEC by the European Commission and the European Free Trade Association, and supports essential requirements of EU Directive(s). For the relationship with EU Directives, see informative Annexes ZZA and ZZB, which are integral parts of this document. Endorsement notice The text of the International Standard IEC 60204-1 :201 6 was approved by CENELEC as a European Standard with agreed common modifications. http://www.china-gauges.com/ 2 BS EN 60204‑1:2018 EN 60204-1 :201 8 (E) Annex ZA (normative) Normative references to international publications with their corresponding European publications The following documents are referred to in the text in such a way that some or all of their content constitutes requirements of this document. For dated references, only the edition cited applies. For undated references, the latest edition of the referenced document (including any amendments) applies. NOTE 1 Where an International Publication has been modified by common modifications, indicated by (mod), the relevant EN/HD applies. NOTE 2 Up-to-date information on the latest versions of the European Standards listed in this annex is available here: www.cenelec.eu. Publication IEC 60034-1 (mod) IEC 60072 Year 201 0 series IEC 60309-1 + A1 (mod) + A2 IEC 60364-1 (mod) 1 999 2005 201 2 2005 IEC 60364-4-41 (mod) - 2005 - IEC 60364-4-43 (mod) 2008 IEC 60364-5-52 (mod) 2009 IEC 60364-5-53 + A1 (mod) + A2 (mod) 2001 2002 201 5 Title Rotating electrical machines Part 1 : Rating and performance Dimensions and output series for rotating electrical machines Plugs, socket-outlets and couplers for industrial purposes Part 1 : General requirements EN/HD EN 60034-1 + corr. October - Year 201 0 201 0 - EN 60309-1 + A1 + A2 HD 60364-1 1 999 2007 201 2 2008 Low-voltage electrical installations Part 1 : Fundamental principles, assessment of general characteristics, definitions Low-voltage electrical installations HD 60364-4-41 2007 Part 4-41 : Protection for safety + corr. July 2007 Protection against electric shock Low voltage electrical installations HD 60364-4-43 201 0 Part 4-43: Protection for safety Protection against overcurrent http://www.china-gauges.com/ Low-voltage electrical installations HD 60364-5-52 201 1 Part 5-52: Selection and erection of electrical equipment - Wiring systems Electrical installations of buildings Part 5-53: Selection and erection of 2008 1 ) HD 60364-5-534 electrical equipment - Isolation, switching and control 201 6 2) HD 60364-5-534 1 ) IEC 60364-5-53:2001 /A1 :2002, Clause 534: “Devices for protection against overvoltages” is harmonized as HD 60364-5-534:2008. HD 60364-5-534:2008 will be superseded by HD 60364-5-534:201 6 on 201 8-1 2-1 4. 2) IEC 60364-5-53:2001 /A2:201 5, Clause 534: “Devices for protection against overvoltages” is harmonized as HD 60364-5-534:201 6. 3 BS EN 60204‑1:2018 EN 60204-1 :201 8 (E) Publication IEC 60364-5-54 Year 201 1 IEC 6041 7-DB 2002 IEC 60445 201 0 IEC 60529 + A1 + A2 IEC 60664-1 1 989 1 999 201 3 2007 IEC 60947-2 201 6 IEC 60947-3 + A1 + A2 2008 201 2 201 5 IEC 60947-5-1 + A1 IEC 60947-5-5 + A1 + A2 2003 2009 1 997 2005 201 6 IEC 60947-6-2 + A1 2002 2007 IEC 61 1 40 201 6 IEC 61 31 0 series 4 Title Low-voltage electrical installations Part 5-54: Selection and erection of electrical equipment - Earthing arrangements and protective conductors Graphical symbols for use on equipment Basic and safety principles for manmachine interface, marking and identification - Identification of equipment terminals, conductor terminations and conductors Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code) Insulation coordination for equipment within low-voltage systems Part 1 : Principles, requirements and tests Low voltage switchgear and controlgear Part 2: Circuit-breakers Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear Part 3: Switches, disconnectors, switch-disconnectors and fusecombination units Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear Part 5-1 : Control circuit devices and switching elements - Electromechanical control circuit devices Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear Part 5-5: Control circuit devices and switching elements - Electrical emergency stop device with mechanical latching function Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear Part 6-2: Multiple function equipment Control and protective switching devices (or equipment) (CPS) Protection against electric shock Common aspects for installation and equipment Safety of machinery - Indication, marking and actuation EN/HD HD 60364-5-54 Year 201 1 - - EN 60445 201 0 EN 60529 + corr. May + A1 + A2 EN 60664-1 1 991 1 993 2000 201 3 2007 EN 60947-2 201 7 EN 60947-3 + A1 + A2 2009 201 2 201 5 EN 60947-5-1 2004 + corr. November 2004 + corr. July 2005 + A1 2009 EN 60947-5-5 1 997 http://www.china-gauges.com/ + A1 2005 + A1 1 201 3 + A2 201 7 EN 60947-6-2 + A1 2003 2007 EN 61 1 40 201 6 EN 61 31 0 series BS EN 60204‑1:2018 EN 60204-1 :201 8 (E) Publication IEC 61 439-1 Year 201 1 IEC 61 558-1 + A1 IEC 61 558-2-6 2005 2009 2009 IEC 61 984 2008 IEC 62023 201 1 IEC 62061 + A1 + A2 ISO 701 0 + A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 2005 201 2 201 5 201 1 201 2 201 2 201 2 201 3 201 4 201 4 + A7 ISO 1 3849-1 201 6 201 5 ISO 1 3849-2 201 2 ISO 1 3850 2006 Title Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies Part 1 : General rules Safety of power transformers, power supplies, reactors and similar products Part 1 : General requirements and tests EN/HD EN 61 439-1 Year 201 1 EN 61 558-1 + corr. August + A1 2005 2006 2009 Safety of transformers, reactors, power supply units and similar products for supply voltages up to 1 1 00 V Part 2-6: Particular requirements and tests for safety isolating transformers and power supply units incorporating safety isolating transformers Connectors - Safety requirements and tests Structuring of technical information and documentation Safety of machinery - Functional safety of safety-related electrical, electronic and programmable electronic control systems EN 61 558-2-6 2009 EN 61 984 2009 EN 62023 201 2 EN 62061 + corr. February + A1 + A2 EN ISO 701 0 + A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 2005 201 0 201 3 201 5 201 2 201 4 201 4 201 4 201 4 201 5 201 6 Graphical symbols - Safety colours and safety signs - Registered safety signs Safety of machinery - Safety-related Parts of control systems Part 1 : General principles for design Safety of machinery - Safety-related Parts of control systems Part 2: Validation 3) Safety of machinery - Emergency stop Principles for design 201 7 + A7 EN ISO 1 3849-1 201 5 http://www.china-gauges.com/ EN ISO 1 3849-2 201 2 EN ISO 1 3850 2006 3) Superseded by ISO 1 3850:201 5, Safety of machinery - Emergency stop function - Principles for design. 4) EN ISO 1 3850:2006 is superseded by EN ISO 1 3850:201 5, which is based on ISO 1 3850:201 5. 4) 5 BS EN 60204‑1:2018 EN 60204-1 :201 8 (E) Annex ZZA (informative) Relationship between this European Standard and the essential requirements of Directive 2006/42/EC [2006 OJ L 1 57] aimed to be covered This European Standard has been prepared under a Commission’s standardization request M/396 EN to provide one voluntary means of conforming to essential requirements of Directive 2006/42/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 1 7 May 2006 on machinery, and amending Directive 95/1 6/EC (recast) [2006 OJ L 1 57]. Once this standard is cited in the Official Journal of the European Union under that Directive, compliance with the normative clauses of this standard given in Table ZZA.1 confers, within the limits of the scope of this standard, a presumption of conformity with the corresponding requirements of that Directive, and associated EFTA regulations. Table ZZA.1 – Correspondence between this European Standard and Annex 1 of Directive 2006/42/EC [2006 OJ L 1 57] Essential Requirements of Directive 2006/42/EC 1 .2.1 1 .2.2 1 .2.3 1 .2.4.1 1 .2.4.2 1 .2.4.3 1 .2.4.4 1 .2.5 1 .2.6 1 .5.1 1 .5.4 1 .5.5 1 .6.3 1 .6.4 1 .7.1 . 1 .7.1 .1 1 .7.1 .2 1 .7.2 1 .7.4.2 (e,g, i,j,m,p,r,s,t) 1 .7.4.2 u, 1 .5.8 6 Clause(s) / sub-clause(s) of this EN Clause 4, 5.4, 7.4, 7.5, 7.6, 7.8, 7.1 0, 8.4, Clause 9, 1 0.6, 1 0.9, 1 1 .2.3 4.4, Clause 1 0, Clause 1 1 , 1 6.3 7.3.1 , 7.5, 9.2.3.2, 9.3.1 9.2.2, 9.2.3.3 9.2.2, 9.2.3.3, 9.2.3.6, 9.4 9.2.3.4.2, 1 0.7 9.2.3.3, 9.2.3.4.2 9.2.3.5 5.4, 7.5 All 1 3.4.5(d), Clause 1 7 7.4, 1 6.2.2 5.3, 1 0.8 Clause 1 1 Clause 1 6, Clause 1 7 Clause 1 6, Clause 1 7 1 0.1 .1 , 1 0.3, 1 0.4, Clause 1 6 Clause 1 6, Clause 1 7 Clause 1 7 Remarks / Notes http://www.china-gauges.com/ These essential requirements are specifically excluded as noise has not been considered BS EN 60204‑1:2018 EN 60204-1 :201 8 (E) Essential Requirements of Directive 2006/42/EC 1 .5.1 0, 1 .5.1 1 Clause(s) / sub-clause(s) of this EN Remarks / Notes during the development of the standard These essential requirements have been excluded as the electromagnetic compliance information only gives methods that have proved useful and are supplied as guidance. WARNING 1 — Presumption of conformity stays valid only as long as a reference to this European Standard is maintained in the list published in the Official Journal of the European Union. Users of this standard should consult frequently the latest list published in the Official Journal of the European Union. WARNING 2 — Other Union legislation may be applicable to the product(s) falling within the scope of this standard. http://www.china-gauges.com/ 7 BS EN 60204‑1:2018 EN 60204-1 :201 8 (E) Annex ZZB (informative) Relationship between this European Standard and the safety objectives of Directive 201 4/35/EU [201 4 OJ L96] aimed to be covered This European standard has been prepared under a Commission’s standardization request relating to harmonised standards in the field of the Low Voltage Directive, M/51 1 , to provide one voluntary means of conforming to safety objectives of Directive 201 4/35/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council of 26 February 201 4 on the harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to the making available on the market of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits [201 4 OJ L96]. Once this standard is cited in the Official Journal of the European Union under that Directive, compliance with the normative clauses of this standard given in Table ZZB.1 confers, within the limits of the scope of this standard, a presumption of conformity with the corresponding safety objectives of that Directive, and associated EFTA regulations. Table ZZB.1 – Correspondence between this European Standard and Annex I of Directive 201 4/35/EU [201 4 OJ L96] Safety objectives of Directive 201 4/35/EU 1 a) Clause(s) / sub-clause(s) of this EN Clause 1 6, 5. 1 , 5. 2, 5. 3, 5. 6, 6. 2, Remarks/note 8. 2, 8. 3, 1 0. 2, 1 0. 8, 1 1 . 1 , 1 1 . 2, 1 3. 1 , 1 3. 2 1 b) 4. 2, 5. 3, 5. 5, 6. 2, 6. 2. 4, 7. 2, , 1 1 .2, Clause 1 2, 1 3, 1 3.4.4, 1 3.4.5, 1 4.4, Clause 1 5, Clause 1 7, Clause 1 8 Introduction, 1 , 3, 1 1 .1 , 1 1 .2 Refer to 2a) to 2d) and 3a) to 3c)in this table 4.1 , 4.2, Clause 5, Clause 6, 7.1 , 7.2, 7.7, 7.8, 7.1 0, Clause 8, Clause 9, 1 1 .3, 1 1 .4, Clause 1 2, 1 3.2, Clause 1 5, Clause 1 6, http://www.china-gauges.com/ Clause 1 8, Annex A Clause 4, 4.4.3, 4.5, 7.2, 7.3, For electromagnetic fields, this 7.4, 7.9, 7.1 0, 1 1 .2.3, 1 1 .4, standard does not provide Clause 1 2, 1 3.1 .4, 1 4.4, 1 4.5, performance requirements for either 1 6.2.2 immunity or emissions. Only general advice is given. EMF is not covered. Ionizing radiation is not considered. 4.1 , 4.4.8, 5.3, 5.4, 5.5, 5.6, 7.5, Noise is not considered in this 7.6, Clause 9, Clause 1 0, 1 3.1 , standard. Functional safety is not Clause 1 4, 1 5.2 fully covered. Explosion of batteries has not been covered by this standard. Optical radiation is not covered. 6.2.3, 6.3, 6.4, 7.2.7, 9.4, Clause 1 2, 1 3.3, 1 3.4.3, 1 3.5, 7. 2. 2, 8. 2, 9. 2, 1 c) 2 a) 2 b) 2 c) 2 d) 8 BS EN 60204‑1:2018 EN 60204-1 :201 8 (E) Safety objectives of Directive 201 4/35/EU 3 a) 3 b) 3 c) Clause(s) / sub-clause(s) of this EN 1 4.4, Clause 1 8 6.2.2, 6.2.3, 8.2.1 , 8.2.2, 8.2.3, 1 1 .4, 1 2.2, 1 2.3, 1 2.6.1 , 1 2.6.2, 1 3.3, 1 3.4, 1 3.5, 1 4.2 1 4.6 4.6, 6.2.3, 1 0.1 .3, 1 1 .3, 1 1 .4, 1 2.7.6 Remarks/note The standard only considers the mechanical requirements for electrical parts of a machine. For EMC, this standard does not provide performance requirements for either immunity or emissions. Only general advice is given Hazard associated with EMC and functional safety are not covered. Safety-related security is not covered 3, Clause 7, Clause 8, 9.2, 1 1 .4, 1 4.6, 1 5.1 WARNING 1 — Presumption of conformity stays valid only as long as a reference to this European Standard is maintained in the list published in the Official Journal of the European Union. Users of this standard should consult frequently the latest list published in the Official Journal of the European Union. WARNING 2 — Other Union legislation may be applicable to the product(s) falling within the scope of this standard. http://www.china-gauges.com/ 9 BS EN 60204‑1:2018 –2– I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 CON TEN TS FOREWORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 0 I N TRODU CTI ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 3 1 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 5 2 N ormative references. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 6 3 Terms, defin itions and abbreviated terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 7 3. 1 Terms an d defin itions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 7 3. 2 Abbreviated terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 General requ iremen ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 4 4. 1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 4. 2 Selection of equ ipmen t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 4. 2. 1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 4. 2. 2 Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 4. 3 Electrical suppl y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 4. 3. 1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 4. 3. 2 AC su pplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 4. 3. 3 DC su pplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 4. 3. 4 Special supply systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 4. 4 Physical en vironmen t and operating cond itions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 4. 4. 1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 4. 4. 2 Electromagnetic compatibility (EM C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 4. 4. 3 Ambien t air temperatu re . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 4. 4. 4 H u mid ity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 4. 4. 5 Altitu de . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 4. 4. 6 Con taminan ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 4. 4. 7 I onizin g an d n on-ionizing radiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 4. 4. 8 Vibration , shock, and bump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 4. 5 Transportation an d storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 4. 6 Provisions for handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 5 I ncomin g suppl y cond uctor terminations and devices for discon necting and switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 5. 1 I ncomin g supply conductor terminations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . http://www.china-gauges.com/ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 5. 2 Terminal for connection of the external protective conductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 5. 3 Su ppl y disconnectin g (isolatin g) d evice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 5. 3. 1 5. 3. 2 Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 5. 3. 3 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 5. 3. 4 Operating means of the su ppl y d iscon necting device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 5. 3. 5 Excepted circu its . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 5. 4 Devices for removal of power for preven tion of un expected start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 5. 5 Devices for isolatin g electrical equ ipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 5. 6 Protection against unau thorized, inad vertent and/or mistaken connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Protection against electric shock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 6 6. 1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 6. 2 Basic protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 6. 2. 1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 6. 2. 2 Protection by encl osures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 –3– Protection by insu lation of l ive parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 6. 2. 3 6. 2. 4 Protection against residual vol tages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 6. 2. 5 Protection by barriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 6. 2. 6 Protection by placin g ou t of reach or protection by obstacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 6. 3 Faul t protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 6. 3. 1 6. 3. 2 Preven tion of the occurrence of a touch vol tage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 6. 3. 3 Protection by automatic disconnection of supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 6. 4 Protection by the use of PELV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 6. 4. 1 General requ iremen ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 6. 4. 2 Sources for PELV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 7 Protection of equ ipmen t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 7. 1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 7. 2 Overcurrent protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 7. 2. 1 7. 2. 2 Supply con ductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 7. 2. 3 Power circu its . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 7. 2. 4 Con trol circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 7. 2. 5 Socket ou tlets and their associated conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 7. 2. 6 Lighting circu its . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 7. 2. 7 Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 7. 2. 8 Location of overcurren t protective devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 7. 2. 9 Overcurren t protective devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 7. 2. 1 0 Ratin g an d settin g of overcurren t protective devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 7. 3 Protection of motors against overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 7. 3. 1 7. 3. 2 Overload protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 7. 3. 3 Over-temperature protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 7. 4 Protection against abnormal temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 7. 5 Protection against the effects of suppl y in terruption or vol tage red uction and su bseq uen t restoration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 7. 6 M otor overspeed protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 7. 7 Ad ditional earth faul t/residual current protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 7. 8 Phase sequence protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . http://www.china-gauges.com/ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 7. 9 Protection against overvol tages d ue to l ightning and to switchin g surges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 7. 1 0 Short-circu it curren t ratin g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 8 Eq uipoten tial bonding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 8. 1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 8. 2 Protective bond ing circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 8. 2. 1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 8. 2. 2 Protective conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 8. 2. 3 Con tinu ity of the protective bon ding circu it . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 8. 2. 4 Protective conductor connecting poin ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 8. 2. 5 M obile machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 8. 2. 6 Additional req uiremen ts for electrical equ ipmen t havin g earth leakage cu rren ts higher than 1 0 mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 8. 3 M easures to restrict the effects of high l eakage cu rren t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 8. 4 Functional bond ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 9 Con trol circuits an d con trol fu nctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 BS EN 60204‑1:2018 –4– I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 9. 1 Con trol circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 9. 1 . 1 Con trol circuit suppl y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 9. 1 . 2 Con trol circuit voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 9. 1 . 3 Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 9. 2 Con trol fu nctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 9. 2. 1 9. 2. 2 Categories of stop fu nctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 9. 2. 3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 9. 2. 4 Cableless control system (CCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 9. 3 Protective interl ocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Reclosin g or resetting of an in terlocking safeguard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 9. 3. 1 9. 3. 2 Exceeding operatin g l imits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 9. 3. 3 Operation of au xil iary functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 9. 3. 4 I nterlocks between differen t operations and for contrary motions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 9. 3. 5 Reverse curren t braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 9. 3. 6 Suspension of safety fu nctions and /or protective measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 9. 4 Con trol fu nctions in the event of failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 9. 4. 1 General requ iremen ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 9. 4. 2 M easures to minimize risk in the even t of fail ure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 9. 4. 3 Protection against mal function of con trol circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 1 0 Operator in terface and machine-mou n ted con trol devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 1 0. 1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 General requ iremen ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 1 0. 1 . 1 1 0. 1 . 2 Location and moun ting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 1 0. 1 . 3 Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 1 0. 1 . 4 Position sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 1 0. 1 . 5 Portable and pendant control stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 1 0. 2 Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 1 0. 2. 1 Colours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 1 0. 2. 2 M arkings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 1 0. 3 I n dicator l ights and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 1 0. 3. 1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 1 0. 3. 2 Colours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 1 0. 3. 3 Flashing lights and d isplays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . http://www.china-gauges.com/ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 1 0. 4 I ll umin ated push-bu ttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 1 0. 5 Rotary control d evices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 1 0. 6 Start devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 1 0. 7 Emergency stop devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Location of emergency stop devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 1 0. 7. 1 1 0. 7. 2 Types of emergency stop device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 1 0. 7. 3 Operation of the suppl y d isconnecting device to effect emergency stop . . . . . . . . . 70 1 0. 8 Emergency switching off d evices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 1 0. 8. 1 Location of emergency switching off d evices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 1 0. 8. 2 Types of emergency switchin g off d evice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 1 0. 8. 3 Local operation of the suppl y disconnectin g device to effect emergency switching off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 1 0. 9 En abling con trol device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 1 1 Con trolgear: location , mounting, and enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 1 1 . 1 General requiremen ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 –5– 1 1 . 2 Location and moun ting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 1 1 . 2. 1 Accessibility and main ten ance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 1 1 . 2. 2 Physical separation or grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 1 1 . 2. 3 H eating effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 1 1 . 3 Degrees of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 1 1 . 4 Enclosures, d oors and open ings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 1 1 . 5 Access to electrical equ ipmen t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 1 2 Conductors and cabl es . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 1 2. 1 General requiremen ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 1 2. 2 Conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 1 2. 3 I nsul ation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 1 2. 4 Cu rren t-carrying capacity in n ormal service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 1 2. 5 Conductor an d cable vol tage d rop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 1 2. 6 Fl exibl e cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 1 2. 6. 1 1 2. 6. 2 M echan ical rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 1 2. 6. 3 Cu rren t-carrying capacity of cables wound on d ru ms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 1 2. 7 Conductor wires, cond uctor bars and slip-ring assembl ies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 1 2. 7. 1 Basic protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 1 2. 7. 2 Protective conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 1 2. 7. 3 Protective conductor curren t collectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 1 2. 7. 4 Removable cu rrent collectors with a disconnector fu nction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 1 2. 7. 5 Clearances in air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 1 2. 7. 6 Creepage distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 1 2. 7. 7 Conductor system section in g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 1 2. 7. 8 Construction and installation of con ductor wire, conductor bar systems and slip-ring assembl ies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 1 3 Wiring practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 1 3. 1 Connections and rou ting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 1 3. 1 . 1 General requ iremen ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 1 3. 1 . 2 Conductor an d cable runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 1 3. 1 . 3 Conductors of differen t circu its . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 1 3. 1 . 4 AC circu its – El ectromagn etic effects (preven tion of edd y curren ts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 1 3. 1 . 5 Connection between pick-up and pick-up con verter ofhttp://www.china-gauges.com/ an in ductive power supply system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 1 3. 2 I d en tification of con ductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 General requ iremen ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 1 3. 2. 1 1 3. 2. 2 I den tification of the protective conductor / protective bondin g conductor . . . . . . . . 82 1 3. 2. 3 I den tification of the neutral conductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 1 3. 2. 4 I den tification by colou r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 1 3. 3 Wiring inside enclosu res . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 1 3. 4 Wiring outsid e enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 General requ iremen ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 1 3. 4. 1 1 3. 4. 2 External ducts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 1 3. 4. 3 Connection to moving elemen ts of the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 1 3. 4. 4 I nterconnection of devices on the machin e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 1 3. 4. 5 Plug/socket combin ations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 1 3. 4. 6 Disman tling for shipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 1 3. 4. 7 Additional conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 BS EN 60204‑1:2018 –6– I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 1 3. 5 Ducts, connection boxes and other boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 1 3. 5. 1 General requ iremen ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 1 3. 5. 2 Rigid metal condu it and fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 1 3. 5. 3 Flexibl e metal conduit an d fittin gs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 1 3. 5. 4 Flexibl e non-metal lic cond uit and fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 1 3. 5. 5 Cable tru nkin g systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 1 3. 5. 6 M achine compartmen ts and cable tru nking systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 1 3. 5. 7 Connection boxes and other boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 1 3. 5. 8 M otor conn ection boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 1 4 El ectric motors an d associated equ ipmen t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 1 4. 1 General requiremen ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 1 4. 2 M otor enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 1 4. 3 M otor dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 1 4. 4 M otor mounting and compartmen ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 1 4. 5 Criteria for motor sel ection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 1 4. 6 Protective devices for mechan ical brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 1 5 Socket-ou tlets and lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 1 5. 1 Socket-ou tlets for accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 1 5. 2 Local l ighting of the machin e and of the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 1 5. 2. 1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 1 5. 2. 2 Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 1 5. 2. 3 Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 1 5. 2. 4 Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 1 6 M arking, warning signs and reference designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 1 6. 1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 1 6. 2 Warn ing signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 1 6. 2. 1 Electric shock hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 1 6. 2. 2 H ot surfaces hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 1 6. 3 Functional id en tification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 1 6. 4 M arking of enclosures of electrical eq uipmen t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 1 6. 5 Reference designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 1 7 Technical documen tation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 1 7. 1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .http://www.china-gauges.com/ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 1 7. 2 I n formation related to the electrical equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 1 8 Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 1 8. 1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 1 8. 2 Verification of cond itions for protection by au tomatic d isconnection of suppl y . . . . . . . 94 1 8. 2. 1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 1 8. 2. 2 Test 1 – Verification of the con tinuity of the protective bond ing circuit . . . . . . . . . . . 95 1 8. 2. 3 Test 2 – Faul t l oop imped ance verification and suitability of the associated overcurren t protective d evice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 1 8. 2. 4 Appl ication of the test methods for TN -systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 1 8. 3 I nsul ation resistance tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 1 8. 4 Voltage tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 1 8. 5 Protection against residu al voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 1 8. 6 Functional tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 1 8. 7 Retesting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Annex A (n ormative) Faul t protection by au tomatic discon nection of supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 –7– Faul t protection for machines suppl ied from TN -systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 A. 1 A. 1 . 1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 A. 1 . 2 Conditions for protection by automatic d isconnection of the suppl y by overcurren t protective devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 A. 1 . 3 Condition for protection by red ucing the touch voltage below 50 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 00 A. 1 . 4 Verification of conditions for protection by automatic d iscon nection of the suppl y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 01 A. 2 Faul t protection for machines suppl ied from TT-systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 03 A. 2. 1 Connection to earth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 03 A. 2. 2 Fau l t protection for TT systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 03 A. 2. 3 Verification of protection by au tomatic d isconnection of supply usin g a residual curren t protective device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 04 A. 2. 4 M easuremen t of the fau lt l oop impedance ( Zs ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 05 Annex B (in formative) En qu iry form for the electrical equipmen t of machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 07 Annex C (informative) Examples of machines covered by this part of I EC 60204 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 1 Annex D (informative) Cu rren t-carryin g capacity and overcurren t protection of conductors and cabl es in the electrical equipmen t of machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 3 D. 1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 3 D. 2 General operating cond itions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 3 D. 2. 1 Ambien t air temperatu re . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 3 D. 2. 2 M ethods of installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 3 D. 2. 3 Grou ping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 5 D. 2. 4 Classification of conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 6 D. 3 Co-ord in ation between conductors an d protective devices provid ing overload protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 6 D. 4 Overcurrent protection of conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 7 D. 5 Effect of harmon ic curren ts on balanced three-phase systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 8 Annex E (in formative) Explanation of emergency operation functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 9 Annex F (in formative) Guid e for the use of this part of I EC 60204 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 20 Annex G (in formative) Comparison of typical cond uctor cross-sectional areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 22 Annex H (informative) M easures to reduce the effects of electromagnetic influences . . . . . . . . . 1 24 H.1 Defin itions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 24 H.1 .1 apparatus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 24 H.1 .2 fixed installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . http://www.china-gauges.com/ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 24 H.2 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 24 H.3 M itigation of electromagn etic in terference (EM I ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 24 H . 3. 1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 24 H . 3. 2 M easures to reduce EM I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 25 H.4 Separation and segregation of cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 25 H.5 Power supply of a machin e by paral lel sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 29 H.6 Su ppl y imped ance where a Power Drive System (PDS) is used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 29 Annex I (in formative) Docu men tation / I nformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 30 Bibliography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 32 Figure Figure Figure Figure 1 2 3 4 – – – – Bl ock d iagram of a typical machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 4 Disconnector isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Disconnecting circu it breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Example of eq uipoten tial bond in g for electrical equ ipmen t of a machin e . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 BS EN 60204‑1:2018 –8– I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 Figure 5 – Symbol I EC 6041 7-501 9: Protective earth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Figure 6 – Symbol I EC 6041 7-5020: Frame or chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Figure 7 – Method a) Earthed con trol circu it fed by a transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Figure 8 – Method b1 ) N on-earthed control circu it fed by transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Figure 9 – Method b2) N on-earthed control circu it fed by transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Figure 1 0 – M ethod b3) N on-earthed con trol circuit fed by transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Figure 1 1 – M ethod c) Con trol circu its fed by transformer with an earthed cen tre-tap wind in g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Figure 1 2 – M ethod d1 a) Con trol circu it without transformer connected between a phase and the neu tral of an earthed su ppl y system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Figure 1 3 – M ethod d1 b) Con trol circu it without transformer connected between two phases of an earthed suppl y system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Figure 1 4 – M ethod d2a) Con trol circu it without transformer connected between phase and n eu tral of a non-earthed su ppl y system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Figure 1 5 – M ethod d2b) con trol circu it withou t transformer connected between two phases of a n on-earthed supply system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Figure 1 6 – Symbol I EC 6041 7-501 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Figure 1 7 – Symbol I EC 6041 7-5021 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Figure 1 8 – Symbol I SO 701 0-W01 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Figure 1 9 – Symbol I SO 701 0-W01 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Figure A. 1 – Typical arran gement for fault loop impedance ( Zs ) measuremen t in TN systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 02 Figure A. 2 – Typical arran gement for fault loop impedance ( Zs ) measurement for power drive system circuits in TN systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 02 Figure A. 3 – Typical arran gement for fault loop impedance ( Zs ) measurement in TT systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 05 Figure A. 4 – Typical arran gement for fault loop impedance ( Zs ) measurement for power drive system circuits in TT systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 06 Figure D. 1 – M ethods of conductor an d cable instal lation in depen den t of n umber of conductors/cabl es . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 4 Figure D. 2 – Parameters of conductors and protective d evices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 6 Figure H . 1 – By-pass con ductor for screen rein forcemen t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 25 Figure H . 2 – Examples of vertical separation an d segregation . . . . . . . . . http://www.china-gauges.com/ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 27 Figure H . 3 – Examples of horizon tal separation and segregation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 27 Figure H . 4 – Cable arrangements in metal cabl e trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 28 Figure H . 5 – Connections between metal cable trays or cabl e trunking systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 28 Figure H . 6 – I n terru ption of metal cable trays at fire barriers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 29 Table Table Table Table of the Table 1 – M in imum cross-sectional area of copper protective conductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 2 – Symbols for actu ators (Power) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 3 – Symbols for actu ators (M achine operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 4 – Colours for ind icator lights and their meanings with respect to the cond ition machin e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 5 – M in imum cross-sectional areas of copper con ductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 –9– Table 6 – Examples of cu rren t-carryin g capacity ( Iz ) of PVC insulated copper conductors or cables under stead y-state con ditions in an ambien t air temperature of + 40 °C for differen t methods of instal lation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Table 7 – Derating factors for cables wound on drums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Table 8 – M in imum permitted ben ding radii for the forced gu id ing of flexible cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Table 9 – Appl ication of the test methods for TN -systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Table 1 0 – Examples of maximum cable l engths from protective devices to their loads for TN -systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Table A. 1 – M aximu m disconnecting times for TN systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Table A. 2 – M aximu m disconnecting time for TT-systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 04 Table D. 1 – Correction factors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 3 Table D. 2 – Derating factors for Iz for grou ping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 5 Table D. 3 – Derating factors for Iz for mu lticore cabl es up to 1 0 mm 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 5 Table D. 4 – Classification of con ductors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 6 Table D. 5 – M aximum al lowable conductor temperatures u nd er n ormal an d shortcircu it conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 7 Table F. 1 – Appl ication options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 21 Table G. 1 – Comparison of cond uctor sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 22 Table H . 1 – M inimu m separation distances usin g metallic contain men t as il lustrated in Figure H . 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 26 Table I . 1 – Documen tation / I n formation that can be applicable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 30 http://www.china-gauges.com/ BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 10 – I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 I N TERNATI ON AL ELECTROTECHN I CAL COMMI SSI ON ____________ SAFETY OF MACHINERY – ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OF MACHINES – Part 1 : General requirements FOREWORD 1 ) Th e I n tern ati on al El ectrotech ni cal Com mi ssi on (I EC) i s a worl d wi d e org ani zati on for stan d ard i zati on com pri si ng al l n ati onal el ectrotech n i cal com mi ttees (I EC N ati on al Com m i ttees). Th e obj ect of I EC i s to prom ote i n ternati on al co-operati on on al l q u esti ons con cerni n g stan d ard i zati on i n th e el ectrical an d el ectroni c fi el d s. To th i s en d an d i n ad d i ti on to oth er acti vi ti es, I EC pu bl i sh es I n tern ati on al Stan d ards, Techn i cal Speci fi cati ons, Tech ni cal Reports, Pu bl i cl y Avai l abl e Speci fi cati on s (PAS) an d Gu i d es (h ereafter referred to as “I EC Pu bl i cati on (s)”). Th ei r preparati on i s entru sted to tech n ical com m i ttees; an y I EC N ati onal Com m i ttee i nterested i n th e su bj ect d eal t wi th may parti ci pate i n thi s preparatory work. I ntern ati on al , g overn m en tal and n on g overn m en tal org an izati on s l i ai si ng wi th th e I EC al so parti ci pate i n th i s preparati on . I EC col l aborates cl osel y wi th th e I n ternati on al Org an i zati on for Stan d ard i zati on (I SO) i n accordan ce wi th cond i ti ons d etermi n ed by ag reem ent between th e two org an i zati ons. 2) Th e formal d eci si on s or ag reem en ts of I EC on tech n i cal m atters express, as n earl y as possi bl e, an i nternati on al consensu s of opi ni on on th e rel evan t su bj ects si nce each tech ni cal com m i ttee h as represen tati on from al l i n terested I EC N ati on al Commi ttees. 3) I EC Pu bl i cati on s h ave th e form of recomm en d ati ons for i n tern ati onal u se an d are accepted by I EC N ati on al Com m i ttees i n th at sense. Whi l e al l reason abl e efforts are m ad e to en su re th at th e tech n i cal con ten t of I EC Pu bl i cati ons i s accu rate, I EC can n ot be h el d respon si bl e for th e way i n whi ch they are u sed or for an y m i si n terpretati on by an y en d u ser. 4) I n ord er to prom ote i n tern ati on al u n i formi ty, I EC N ati on al Com mi ttees u n d ertake to appl y I EC Pu bl i cati on s tran sparen tl y to th e m axi m u m exten t possi bl e i n th ei r n ati on al an d reg i on al pu bl i cati ons. An y d i verg en ce between an y I EC Pu bl i cati on an d th e correspon d i n g n ati onal or reg i on al pu bl i cati on sh al l be cl earl y i n d i cated i n th e l atter. 5) I EC i tsel f d oes n ot provi d e an y attestati on of con formi ty. I n d epen d en t certi fi cati on bod i es provi d e conform i ty assessmen t servi ces an d , i n som e areas, access to I EC m arks of con formi ty. I EC i s not responsi bl e for an y servi ces carri ed ou t by i n d epen d en t certi fi cati on bod i es. 6) Al l u sers sh ou l d ensu re th at th ey h ave the l atest ed i ti on of th i s pu bl i cati on . 7) N o l i abi l i ty sh al l attach to I EC or i ts d i rectors, em pl oyees, servan ts or agen ts i ncl u d i n g i n d i vi d u al experts and m em bers of i ts tech ni cal com m i ttees an d I EC N ati on al Com m i ttees for an y person al i n j u ry, property d am ag e or oth er d am age of an y n atu re whatsoever, wh eth er d i rect or i n d i rect, or for costs (i n cl u d i n g l eg al fees) an d expen ses ari si n g ou t of th e pu bl i cati on , u se of, or rel i an ce u pon, thi s I EC Pu bl i cati on or an y oth er I EC Pu bl i cati on s. 8) Attenti on i s d rawn to th e N ormati ve references ci ted i n thi s pu bl i cati on . U se of the referen ced pu bl i cati ons i s http://www.china-gauges.com/ i n d i spensabl e for th e correct appl i cati on of th i s pu bl i cati on . 9) Attenti on i s d rawn to th e possi bi l i ty th at som e of th e el em en ts of thi s I EC Pu bl i cati on m ay be th e su bj ect of paten t ri gh ts. I EC sh al l n ot be h el d responsi bl e for i d en ti fyi ng an y or al l su ch paten t ri g h ts. I n tern ational Standard I EC 60204-1 has been prepared by I EC techn ical committee 44: Safety of machinery – Electrotechnical aspects. This sixth edition cancel s and replaces the fifth ed ition publ ished in 2005. I t constitu tes a technical revision . This edition includes the fol lowing significant technical changes with respect to the previous edition: a) b) c) d) added requiremen ts to ad dress applications in volving power d rive systems (PDS); revised electromagnetic compatibil ity (EM C) req uiremen ts; clarified overcurrent protection requiremen ts; requiremen ts for determination of the short circuit current rating of the electrical equ ipment; BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 – 11 – e) revised protective bon din g requiremen ts an d terminology; f) reorgan ization and revision to Clause 9, includ ing requ iremen ts pertain ing to safe torq ue off of PDS, emergency stop, an d con trol circuit protection; g) revised symbols for actuators of con trol devices; h) revised techn ical docu men tation requ iremen ts; i) general upd ating to curren t special n ational cond itions, n ormative stand ards, and bibliographical references. The text of this standard is based on the foll owing documen ts: FDI S Report on voti ng 44/765/FDI S 44/771 /RVD Full in formation on the votin g for the approval of this stan dard can be fou nd in the report on votin g ind icated in the above table. This publ ication has been drafted in accordance with the I SO/I EC Directives, Part 2. A l ist of all parts in the I EC 60204 series, published un der the general titl e machinery – Electrical equipment of machines , can be foun d on the I EC website. Safety of The fol lowing differing practices of a less permanen t nature exist in the countries ind icated below. 4. 3. 1 : The voltage characteristics of electricity su pplied by public d istribution systems in Europe are given in EN 501 60: 201 0. 5. 1 : Exception is not all owed (U SA). 5. 1 : TN -C systems are not permitted in low-vol tage installations in bu il dings (N orway). 5. 2: Terminals for the conn ection of the protective earthing conductors may be identified by the colour green , the letters “G” or “GR” or “GRD” or “GN D”, or the word “ground ” or “ground in g”, or with the graphical symbol I EC 6041 7-501 9: 200608 or any combination (U SA). 6. 3. 3 b), 1 3. 4. 5 b), 1 8. 2. 1 : TT power systems are not al lowed (U SA). 6. 3. 3, 1 8. 2, Annex A: TN systems are not used . TT systems are the n ational stan dard (J apan). 6. 3. 3 b): The use of residu al curren t protective devices with ahttp://www.china-gauges.com/ rated residual operating curren t not exceed in g 1 A is man datory in TT systems as a means for fau lt protection by au tomatic d isconnection of suppl y (I tal y). 7. 2. 3: Discon nection of the neu tral conductor is man datory in a TN -S system (France and N orway). 7. 2. 3: Third paragraph: d istribu tion of a n eutral cond uctor with an I T system is not al lowed (U SA and N orway). 7. 1 0: For evalu ation of short circuit ratings the requ iremen ts of U L 508A Suppl emen t SB, may be used (U SA). 8. 2. 2: See I EC 60364-5-54: 201 1 , Annex E List of notes concerning certain countries. 9. 1 . 2: M aximu m n ominal AC control circuit vol tage is 1 20 V (U SA). 1 2. 2: Onl y stran ded conductors are allowed on machines, except for 0, 2 mm 2 solid conductors within encl osu res (U SA). 1 2. 2: The smallest power circu it conductor allowed on machines is 0, 82 mm 2 (AWG 1 8) in mu l ticonductor cables or in enclosu res (U SA). Table 5: Cross-section al area is specified in N FPA 79 usin g American Wire Gauge (AWG) (U SA). See Annex G. BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 12 – 1 3. 2. 2: 1 3. 2. 3: 1 5. 2. 2: 1 5. 2. 2: 1 6. 4: I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 For the protective conductor, the colour iden tification GREEN (with or withou t YELLOW stripes) is used as equ ivalen t to the bicolour combination GREEN -AN DYELLOW (U SA an d Canada). The colour id en tification WH I TE or GREY is used for earthed neu tral conductors instead of the col our id en tification BLU E (U SA and Can ada). First paragraph: M aximum valu e between conductors 1 50 V (U SA). Second paragraph, 5 th bullet: The fu l l load curren t ratin g of lightin g circu its does n ot exceed 1 5 A (U SA). N ameplate marking requ iremen ts (U SA). A. 2. 2. 2: The permissible maximum value of R A is regu lated (e. g. when U o ≥ 300V, R A shall be less than 1 0 Ω , when Uo < 300 V, R A shal l be less than 1 00 Ω , Uo is the nomin al AC l ine to earth vol tage in volts (V) (J apan ). A. 2. 2. 2: The maximum permissible value of R A is 83 Ω (N etherlands). The committee has decid ed that the con ten ts of this pu bl ication will remain unchan ged u n til the stability date ind icated on the I EC website u nder "http: //webstore. iec. ch" in the d ata rel ated to the specific publication . At this d ate, the publication wil l be • • • • recon firmed , withd rawn, replaced by a revised edition , or amended . IMPORTANT – The 'colour inside' logo on the cover page of this publication indicates that it contains colours which are considered to be useful for the correct understanding of its contents. Users should therefore print this document using a colour printer. http://www.china-gauges.com/ BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 – 13 – I N TRODUCTI ON This part of I EC 60204 provides requiremen ts and recommend ations relating to the electrical equ ipmen t of machin es so as to promote: – – – safety of persons an d property; consistency of control response; ease of operation an d main tenance. M ore gu idance on the use of this part of I EC 60204 is given in Annex F. Figure 1 has been provided as an aid to the un derstand ing of the inter-relationship of the various elemen ts of a machin e and its associated eq uipmen t. Figure 1 is a block diagram of a typical machine and associated equipmen t showing the various elemen ts of the el ectrical equ ipmen t ad dressed in this part of I EC 60204. N u mbers in paren theses ( ) refer to Clauses and Su bclauses in this part of I EC 60204. I t is un derstood in Figure 1 that all of the elemen ts taken together includ ing the safeguards, tool ing/fixturing, software, and the documentation , constitu te the machin e, and that one or more machin es working together with usuall y at least one level of su pervisory con trol constitu te a manufacturin g cel l or system. http://www.china-gauges.com/ BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 14 – Physical environment (4.4) Power supply (4.3) PE (External protective conductor connection) Conductors and cables (Clause 1 2) Wiring practices (Clause 1 3) Verification (Clause 1 8) I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 Warning signs, item designation (Clause 1 6) Technical documentation (Clause 1 7) System/cell controller Supply disconnecting device (5.3) Protection against electrical shock (Clause 6) Protection of equipment (Clause 7) Earth (PE) terminal (5.2) Protective bonding circuit (8.2) Control circuits and control functions (Clause 9) Emergency operations (9.2.2.4) Controlgear (Clause 1 1 ) Accessories and lighting (Clause 1 5) Data link Emergency stop device (1 0.7) Motor control equipment Motors (Clause 1 4) and transducers Programmable controller Operator control station (Clause 1 0) Input/output interface Safeguards and warning devices Actuators and sensors Processing equipment http://www.china-gauges.com/ IEC Figu re 1 – Block diagram of a typical machine BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 – 15 – SAFETY OF MACHINERY – ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OF MACHINES – Part 1 : General requirements 1 Scope This part of I EC 60204 applies to electrical, electronic and programmabl e electron ic equ ipment an d systems to machin es n ot portable by han d while workin g, includ in g a grou p of machin es working together in a co-ordinated man ner. N OTE 1 Th i s part of I EC 60204 i s an appl i cati on stan d ard an d i s not i n ten d ed to l i mi t or i n hi bi t tech n ol og i cal ad van cem en t. N OTE 2 I n th i s part of I EC 60204, th e term “el ectri cal ” in cl u d es el ectri cal , el ectroni c an d prog ram m abl e el ectroni c m atters (i . e. “el ectri cal eq u i pmen t” m ean s el ectri cal , el ectroni c an d prog ramm abl e el ectroni c eq u i pm en t). N OTE 3 I n the context of thi s part of I EC 60204, th e term “person ” refers to an y i n d i vi d u al an d i ncl u d es th ose person s wh o are assi g n ed an d i n stru cted by th e u ser or h i s agen t(s) i n th e u se an d care of th e m achi n e i n q u esti on . The eq uipmen t covered by this part of I EC 60204 commences at the point of connection of the supply to the electrical equ ipment of the machine (see 5. 1 ). N OTE 4 Th e req u i rem en ts for th e el ectri cal su ppl y i n stal l ation are gi ven i n th e I EC 60364 seri es. This part of I EC 60204 is appl icabl e to the electrical equipment or parts of the electrical equ ipmen t that operate with nominal supply vol tages not exceeding 1 000 V for al ternatin g curren t (AC) and not exceeding 1 500 V for direct curren t (DC), and with nominal supply frequ encies n ot exceed in g 200 H z. N OTE 5 I n formati on on el ectri cal eq u i pm ent or parts of th e el ectri cal eq u i pm en t th at operate wi th hi g her n om i n al su ppl y vol tag es can be fou n d i n I EC 60204-1 1 . This part of I EC 60204 does not cover all the requiremen ts (for example guarding, in terl ocking, or con trol) that are n eeded or requ ired by other stand ards or regul ations in ord er to protect persons from hazards other than electrical hazards. Each type of machin e has u nique req uiremen ts to be accommodated to provid e ad equ ate safety. http://www.china-gauges.com/ This part of I EC 60204 specifical ly includes, bu t is n ot l imited to, the electrical eq u ipmen t of machin es as defined in 3. 1 . 40. N OTE 6 An n ex C l i sts exam pl es of mach i n es wh ose el ectri cal eq u i pm en t can be covered by th i s part of I EC 60204. This part of I EC 60204 does not specify ad ditional and special requ iremen ts that can appl y to the electrical eq uipmen t of machines that, for example: – – – – – – – – are in tended for use in open air (i. e. ou tside buildings or other protective structures); use, process, or produce poten tial ly expl osive material (for example paint or sawdust); are intended for use in potentiall y explosive and /or flammable atmospheres; have special risks when prod ucing or usin g certain materials; are intended for use in mines; are sewin g machin es, un its, and systems (which are covered by I EC 60204-31 ); are hoistin g machines (which are covered by I EC 60204-32); are semicond uctor fabrication eq uipmen t (which are covered by I EC 60204-33). BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 16 – I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 Power circuits where electrical energy is directly used as a workin g tool are exclud ed from this part of I EC 60204. 2 Normative references The following documen ts, in whole or in part, are n ormativel y referenced in this documen t and are in dispensable for its appl ication. For dated references, on ly the edition cited applies. For u ndated references, the latest edition of the referenced docu men t (includ ing an y amendmen ts) appl ies. NOTE In CENELEC, Annex ZA applies instead of Clause 2. I EC 60034-1 , Rotating electrical machines – Part 1: Rating and performance I EC 60072 (all parts), I EC 60309-1 , requirements Dimensions and output series for rotating electrical machines Plugs, socket-outlets, and couplers for industrial purposes – Part 1: General I EC 60364-1 , Low-voltage electrical installations – Part 1: Fundamental principles, assessment of general characteristics, definitions I EC 60364-4-41 : 2005, Low-voltage electrical installations – Part 4-41: Protection for safety – Protection against electric shock I EC 60364-4-43: 2008, Low-voltage electrical installations – Part 4-43: Protection for safety – Protection against overcurrent I EC 60364-5-52: 2009, Low-voltage electrical installations – Part 5-52: Selection and erection of electrical equipment – Wiring systems I EC 60364-5-53: 2001 , Electrical installations of buildings – Part 5-53: Selection and erection of electrical equipment – Isolation, switching and control I EC 60364-5-53: 2001 /AM D1 : 2002 I EC 60364-5-54: 201 1 , Low-voltage electrical installations – Part 5-54: Selection and erection of electrical equipment – Earthing arrangements and protective conductors I EC 6041 7, Graphical symbols symbols. in fo/equ ipment for use on equipment. Avail able from: http: //www. graphicalhttp://www.china-gauges.com/ Basic and safety principles for man-machine interface, marking and identification – Identification of equipment terminals, conductor terminations and conductors I EC 60445: 201 0, I EC 60529, Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code) I EC 60664-1 , Insulation coordination for equipment within low-voltage systems – Part 1: Principles, requirements and tests I EC 60947-2, Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 2: Circuit-breakers I EC 60947-3, Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 3: Switches, disconnectors, switch-disconnectors, and fuse-combination units I EC 60947-5-1 : 2003, Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 5-1: Control circuit devices and switching elements – Electromechanical control circuit devices I EC 60947-5-1 : 2003/AMD1 : 2009 BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 – 17 – I EC 60947-5-5, Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 5-5: Control circuit devices and switching elements – Electrical emergency stop device with mechanical latching function I EC 60947-6-2, Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 6-2: Multiple function equipment – Control and protective switching devices(or equipment) (CPS) Protection against electric shock – Common aspects for installation and I EC 61 1 40, equipment I EC 61 31 0 (all parts), I EC 61 439-1 , Safety of machinery – Indication, marking and actuation Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies – Part 1: General rules Safety of power transformers, power supplies, reactors and similar products – Part 1: General requirements and tests I EC 61 558-1 : 2005, I EC 61 558-1 : 2005/AMD1 : 2009 I EC 61 558-2-6, Safety of transformers, reactors, power supply units and similar products for supply voltages up to 1 100 V – Part 2-6: Particular requirements and tests for safety isolating transformers and power supply units incorporating safety isolating transformers I EC 61 984, Connectors – Safety requirements and tests I EC 62023, Structuring of technical information and documentation Safety of machinery – Functional safety of safety-related electrical, electronic and programmable electronic control systems I EC 62061 , I SO 701 0: 201 1 , signs Graphical symbols – Safety colours and safety signs – Registered safety I SO 1 3849-1 , Safety of machinery – Safety-related parts of control systems – Part 1: General principles for design I SO 1 3849-2, Validation Safety of machinery – Safety-related parts of control systems – Part 2: I SO 1 3850: 2006, 3 3.1 Safety of machinery – Emergency stop function – Principles for design http://www.china-gauges.com/ Terms,definitions and abbreviated terms Terms and definitions For the purposes of this d ocument, the foll owing terms and defin itions appl y. 3.1 .1 actuator part of a device to which an external action is to be appl ied N ote 1 to en try: Th e actu ator m ay take th e form of a h an d l e, kn ob, pu sh -bu tton , rol l er, pl u n g er, etc. N ote 2 to en try: Th ere are som e actu ati n g m ean s th at d o n ot req u i re an extern al actu ati ng force, bu t on l y an acti on, e. g. tou chscreen s. N ote 3 to en try: See al so 3. 1 . 39. BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 18 – I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 3. 1 .2 ambien t temperatu re temperatu re of the air or other med ium where the equ ipmen t is to be used 3. 1 .3 barrier part providing protection against con tact with live parts from any usual d irection of access 3. 1 .4 basi c protecti on protection against electric shock under faul t-free cond itions N ote 1 to en try: Previ ou sl y referred to as “protecti on agai nst d i rect con tact” [SOU RCE: I EC 60050-1 95: 1 998, 1 95-06-01 , mod ified – The n ote has been ad ded . ] 3. 1 .5 cable tray cable support consistin g of a contin uous base and raised edges and no covering N ote 1 to en try: A cabl e tray m ay be perforated or n on -perforated . [SOU RCE: I EC 60050-826: 2004, 826-1 5-08] 3. 1 .6 cable trunkin g system system of cl osed encl osu res comprising a base with a removabl e cover in tended for the complete surroun ding of insu lated con ductors or cabl es 3. 1 .7 con cu rren t occurring or operating at the same time (bu t not necessarily synchronously) 3. 1 . 8 con du ctor wire conductor bar conductive wire or bar of a feed er system with a sliding curren t col lector 3. 1 .9 con du it http://www.china-gauges.com/ part of a closed wirin g system of circu lar or non -circu lar cross-section for insu lated conductors and /or cables in electrical install ations N ote 1 to en try: Con d u i ts shou l d be su ffi ci en tl y cl ose-j oi n ted so that th e i nsu l ated con d u ctors an d /or cabl es can on l y be d rawn i n an d n ot i nserted l ateral l y. [SOU RCE: I EC 60050-442: 1 998, 442-02-03, mod ified – The d efinition has been amen ded and the note has been add ed. ] 3. 1 .1 0 control circu i t , < of a machine > circu it used for the control, includ in g mon i torin g, of a machine and the electrical equ ipmen t 3. 1 .1 1 control devi ce device connected in to the con trol circu it and used for con trolling the operation of the machin e EXAM PLE Positi on sensor, m an u al con trol swi tch , rel ay, con tactor, m ag neti cal l y operated val ve. BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 – 19 – 3. 1 .1 2 control stati on operator con trol station assembl y of one or more con trol actu ators (see 3. 1 . 1 ) fixed on the same pan el or located in the same enclosu re N ote 1 to entry: A con trol stati on m ay al so con tai n rel ated eq u i pm ent, for exam pl e, poten ti om eters, si gn al l amps, i nstru m en ts, d i spl ay d evi ces, etc. [SOU RCE: I EC 60050-441 : 1 984, 441 -1 2-08, mod ified – The second preferred term has been added , the word "switches" has been replaced by "actuators" in the definition and the n ote has been add ed . ] 3. 1 .1 3 con trol gear switching devices and their combin ation with associated con trol , measurin g, protective, and regulatin g equipment, also assemblies of such d evices an d equ ipmen t with associated intercon nections, accessories, enclosu res, an d su pporting structures, in tended in principle for the control of electrical en ergy consuming equ ipmen t [SOU RCE: I EC 60050-441 : 1 984, 441 -1 1 -03] 3. 1 .1 4 con trol l ed stop stopping of machine motion with power to the machine actuators main tain ed during the stopping process 3. 1 .1 5 d i rect con tact contact of persons or livestock with live parts N ote 1 to en try: See 3. 1 . 4. [SOU RCE: I EC 60050-826: 2004, 826-1 2-03, mod ified – The n ote has been ad ded . ] 3. 1 .1 6 di rect open i n g action , < of a contact elemen t > achievement of con tact separation as the d irect resul t of a specified movemen t of the switch actuator throu gh n on-resil ien t members (for example not d ependent upon springs) [SOU RCE: I EC 60947-5-1 : 2003, K. 2. 2] http://www.china-gauges.com/ 3. 1 . 1 7 duct enclosed channel design ed expressl y for holding and protecting electrical con ductors, cables, and busbars N ote 1 to en try: d u ct. Con d u i ts (see 3. 1 . 9), cabl e tru n ki n g system s (see 3. 1 . 6) an d u n d erfl oor ch an nel s are types of 3. 1 .1 8 earth l ocal earth g roun d (U S) l ocal grou nd (U S) part of the Earth which is in el ectric con tact with an earth electrode and the electrical poten tial of which is not necessarily equal to zero [SOU RCE: I EC 60050-1 95: 1 998, 1 95-01 -03] BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 20 – I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 3. 1 .1 9 el ectrical operatin g area room or location for electrical equ ipmen t to which access is intended to be restricted to skilled or instructed persons, by the open ing of a door or the removal of a barrier without the use of a key or tool, and which is clearl y marked by appropriate warning signs 3. 1 .20 el ectron ic equ ipment part of the electrical equ ipmen t contain in g circuitry dependent for its operation on electron ic d evices an d componen ts 3. 1 .21 emergen cy stop devi ce man uall y actuated control device used to initiate an emergency stop function N ote 1 to en try: See 9. 2. 3. 4. 2. [SOU RCE: I SO 1 3850: 2006, 3. 2, mod ified – The n ote has been ad ded . ] 3. 1 .22 emergen cy swi tch in g off devi ce man uall y actuated control device used to switch off or to initiate the switchin g off of the su ppl y of el ectrical energy to al l or a part of an installation where a risk of el ectric shock or another risk of el ectrical origin is involved N ote 1 to en try: See 9. 2. 3. 4. 3. 3. 1 .23 encl osed electri cal operatin g area room or location for electrical equ ipmen t to which access is intended to be restricted to skilled or instructed persons by the use of a key or tool to open a door, or remove a barrier, an d which is clearly marked by appropriate warnin g signs 3. 1 .24 encl osu re part provid ing protection of equ ipmen t against certain extern al in flu ences and, in an y d irection, basic protection as protection against direct con tact N ote 1 to en try: Th e exi sti n g d efi ni ti on taken from th e I EV n eed s th e fol l owi n g expl an ati ons wi th i n th e scope of th i s part of I EC 60204: a) En cl osu res provi d e protecti on of person s or l i vestock ag ai nst access to h azardhttp://www.china-gauges.com/ ou s parts. b) Barri ers, sh aped openi n gs, or an y oth er m ean s su i tabl e to preven t or l i mi t th e penetrati on of the speci fi ed test probes, wh eth er attach ed to the en cl osu re or formed by th e en cl osed eq u i pm en t, are consid ered as part of th e en cl osu re, except wh ere th ey can be removed wi th ou t th e u se of a key or tool . c) An encl osu re may be: – a cabi net or box, ei th er m ou n ted on th e m achi n e or separate from th e mach i n e; – a com partmen t consi sti n g of an encl osed space wi thi n th e m achi n e structu re. [SOU RCE: I EC 60050-1 95: 1 998, 1 95-02-35, mod ified – The definition has been amen ded . ] 3. 1 .25 el ectrical eq u ipmen t items used in con nection with the util isation of electricity by machin es or parts of machin es, for exampl e material, fittings, d evices, componen ts, appl iances, fixtures, apparatus, and similar BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 3. 1 .26 equ i potential bon di ng provision of electric equ ipoten tial ity connections – 21 – between conductive parts, in tend ed to achieve [SOU RCE: I EC 60050-1 95: 1 998, 1 95-01 -1 0] 3. 1 .27 exposed con du cti ve part conductive part of electrical equipmen t, which can be touched and which is not live under normal operatin g con ditions, bu t which can become live un der fau lt con diti ons [SOU RCE: I EC 60050-826: 2004, 826-1 2-1 0, mod ified – The d efinition has been amen ded . ] 3. 1 .28 extran eous-con du cti ve-part conductive part not formin g part of the electrical instal lation an d liable to in trod uce an electric poten tial , gen eral l y the electric potential of a local earth [SOU RCE: I EC 60050-1 95: 1 998, 1 95-06-1 1 ] 3. 1 . 29 fai l u re termination of the ability of an item to perform a requ ired function N ote 1 to en try: After fai l u re, th e i tem h as a fau l t. N ote 2 to en try: "Fai l u re" i s an even t, as d i sti n g u i sh ed from "fau l t", wh i ch i s a state. N ote 3 to en try: Th i s con cept as d efi n ed d oes n ot appl y to i tem s consi sti n g of software onl y. N ote 4 to en try: I n practi ce, th e terms fau l t an d fai l u re are often u sed syn on ym ou sl y. [SOU RCE: I EC 60050-1 91 : 1 990, 1 91 -04-01 ] 3. 1 .30 fau l t state of an item characterized by inabil ity to perform a requ ired function , exclu ding the inabil ity d urin g preven tive main tenance or other planned actions, or due to l ack of extern al resources http://www.china-gauges.com/ N ote 1 to en try: A fau l t i s often th e resu l t of a fai l u re of th e i tem i tsel f, bu t m ay exi st wi thou t pri or fai l u re. N ote 2 to en try: I n En gl i sh, the term “fau l t” an d i ts d efi ni ti on are i d entical wi th those g i ven i n I EC 60050-1 91 : 1 990, 1 91 -05-01 . I n th e fi el d of m ach i n ery, th e Fren ch term “d éfau t” an d the German term “Fehl er” are u sed rath er th an th e terms “pann e” an d “Feh l zu stan d ” th at appear wi th thi s d efi ni ti on. 3. 1 .31 fau lt protecti on protection against electric shock under single-fault conditions N ote 1 to en try: Previ ou sl y referred to as “protecti on agai nst i nd i rect con tact” [SOU RCE: I EC 60050-1 95: 1 998, 1 95-06-02, mod ified – the N ote has been added] 3. 1 .32 fu nctional bon d in g equ ipoten tial bond ing necessary for proper functioning of electrical equipmen t BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 22 – I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 3. 1 .33 h azard poten tial sou rce of physical inj ury or d amage to heal th N ote 1 to entry: Th e term h azard can be q u al i fi ed i n order to d efi n e i ts ori gi n (for exampl e, m ech ani cal h azard , el ectri cal h azard ) or the n atu re of th e poten ti al h arm (for exam pl e, el ectri c sh ock h azard , cu tti ng h azard , toxi c h azard, fi re h azard ). N ote 2 to en try: Th e h azard en vi sag ed i n thi s d efi n i ti on : – ei ther is perman en tl y presen t d u ri n g th e i n ten d ed u se of th e m achi n e (for exam pl e moti on of h azard ou s movi n g el emen ts, el ectri c arc d u ri n g a wel d i ng ph ase, u n h eal th y postu re, noise emi ssi on, hi g h tem peratu re); – or can appear u n expected l y (for exam pl e: expl osi on, cru shi ng h azard as a conseq u en ce of an u n i nten d ed /u n expected start-u p, ej ecti on as a conseq u en ce of a breakag e, fal l as a con seq u ence of accel erati on /d ecel erati on ). [SOU RCE: I SO 1 21 00: 201 0, 3. 6, mod ified – The word “harm" has been replaced by " physical in jury or damage to heal th" in the defin ition and N ote 3 has been removed] 3. 1 .34 i n direct con tact con tact of persons or livestock with exposed con ductive parts which have become l ive u nder faul t cond itions N ote 1 to en try: See 3. 1 . 31 . [SOU RCE: I EC 60050-826: 2004, 826-1 2-04, mod ified – The definition has been amen ded . ] 3. 1 .35 i n du cti ve power su pply system system of inductive power transfer, consisting of a track con verter and a track conductor, along which on e or more pick-u p(s) an d associated pick-up con verter(s) can move, withou t an y gal van ic or mechanical con tact, in order to transfer el ectrical power for example to a mobile machine N ote 1 to entry: respecti vel y. Th e track con d u ctor an d the pi ck-u p are an al ogou s to th e pri mary an d secon d ary of a tran sform er 3. 1 .36 i n structed person , < in electricity > person adequ ately ad vised or supervised by an el ectricall y skil led person to enable him or her to perceive risks an d to avoid hazards which electricity can create http://www.china-gauges.com/ [SOU RCE: I EC 60050-826: 2004, 826-1 8-02, mod ified – “an electricall y skilled person” has been used to replace “electricall y skil led persons”] 3. 1 .37 i n terl ock arrangemen t of devices operatin g together to: • preven t hazardous situations, or • preven t damage to equipmen t or material , or • preven t specified operations, or • ensure correct operations 3. 1 .38 l i ve part conductor or conductive part in tended to be energized in normal use, inclu ding a n eu tral conductor, bu t, by con ven tion, not a PEN con ductor BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 – 23 – 3.1 .39 machine actuator power mechan ism of the machine used to effect motion (for example, motor, solenoid, pneu matic or hydraulic cylinder) 3.1 .40 machinery machine assembl y of linked parts or compon en ts, at least one of which moves, with the appropriate machin e actuators, con trol and power circu its, join ed together for a specific appl ication , in particu lar for the processing, treatment, moving or packaging of a material N ote 1 to entry: Th e term "machi n ery" al so covers an assem bl y of m achi n es wh i ch , i n ord er to achi eve th e sam e en d , are arran ged an d con trol l ed so th at th ey fu n cti on as an i n teg ral whol e. N ote 2 to en try: com pon en ts. Th e term "com pon ent" i s u sed h ere i n a g en eral sense an d i t d oes n ot refer on l y to el ectri cal [SOU RCE: I SO 1 21 00: 201 0, 3. 1 , modified – The definition has been amen ded and N ote 2 referrin g to an Ann ex has been removed an d replaced by the presen t N ote 2 to entry. ] 3.1 .41 marking signs or inscriptions primaril y for the purpose of id entifying equ ipmen t, components and /or devices 3.1 .42 neutral conductor N conductor el ectrical ly connected to the neu tral poin t and capable of con tributing to the distribution of el ectrical energy [SOU RCE: I EC 60050-1 95: 1 998, 1 95-02-06] 3.1 .43 obstacle part preven tin g un in ten tional d irect con tact with l ive parts, but n ot preventin g d irect con tact by del iberate action [SOU RCE: I EC 60050-1 95: 1 998, 1 95-06-1 6, mod ified – The words “(electricall y) protective” have been removed from the term. ] http://www.china-gauges.com/ 3.1 .44 overcurrent cu rren t exceeding the rated value N ote 1 to en try: For cond u ctors, th e rated val u e i s consi d ered as eq u al to th e cu rren t-carryi n g capaci ty. [SOU RCE: I EC 60050-826: 2004, 826-1 1 -1 4, mod ified – The definition has been amen ded . ] 3.1 .45 overload of a circuit time/curren t rel ationship in a circu it which is in excess of the rated full load of the circu it when the circu it is n ot un der a faul t condition N ote 1 to en try: Overl oad sh ou l d n ot be u sed as a syn on ym for overcu rren t. BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 24 – I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 3. 1 .46 pl ug /socket combi nation componen t and a su itable matin g componen t, appropriate to terminate conductors, in tended for con nection or disconn ection of two or more con ductors N ote 1 to en try: Exam pl es of pl u g/socket com bi nati on i ncl u d e: – con n ectors whi ch fu l fi l th e req u i rem en ts of I EC 61 984; – a pl u g and socket-ou tl et, a cabl e cou pl er, or an appl i ance cou pl er i n accord an ce wi th I EC 60309-1 ; – a pl u g an d socket-ou tl et i n accord an ce wi th I EC 60884-1 or an appl i ance cou pl er i n accord ance wi th I EC 60320-1 . 3. 1 .47 power ci rcui t circu it that su pplies power to u nits of equ ipmen t used for prod uctive operation and to transformers supplying con trol circu its 3. 1 .48 prospecti ve short-ci rcui t cu rrent Icp r. m. s. value of the curren t which woul d fl ow when the suppl y conductors to the el ectrical equ ipmen t are short-circu ited by a conductor of n egligible impedance l ocated as near as practicable to the su ppl y terminals of the electrical equ ipment [SOU RCE: I EC 61 439-1 : 201 1 , 3. 8. 7, mod ified – “assembly” has been replaced by “el ectrical equ ipmen t”] 3. 1 .49 protecti ve bon d in g equ ipotential bond ing for protection against electric shock N ote 1 to en try: M easu res for protecti on ag ai n st el ectri c sh ock can al so red u ce th e ri sk of bu rn s or fi re. N ote 2 to en try: Protecti ve bon d i n g can be achi eved wi th protecti ve con d u ctors an d protecti ve bon d i n g con d u ctors an d by con d u cti ve j oi n i n g of con d u cti ve parts of th e m achi n e an d i ts el ectri cal eq u i pm ent. 3. 1 .50 protecti ve bon d in g ci rcu it protective conductors an d conductive parts connected together to provid e protection against electric shock in the even t of an insul ation failu re 3. 1 .51 protecti ve cond uctor http://www.china-gauges.com/ conductor providing a primary faul t curren t path from the exposed cond uctive parts of the electrical equ ipmen t to a protective earthing (PE) terminal 3. 1 .52 redu n dan cy application of more than on e device or system, or part of a device or system, with the obj ective of ensuring that in the even t of one fail ing to perform its fu nction , an other is availabl e to perform that fu nction 3. 1 .53 referen ce design ati on d istinctive code which serves to iden tify an object in the docu men tation and on the eq uipmen t 3. 1 .54 ri sk combin ation of the probabil ity of occu rrence of harm (i. e. physical in jury or d amage to heal th) and the severity of that harm BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 – 25 – [SOU RCE: I SO 1 21 00: 201 0, 3. 1 2, modified – The text in paren theses has been add ed] 3. 1 . 55 safegu ard guard or protective device provid ed as a means to protect persons from a hazard [SOU RCE: I SO 1 21 00: 201 0, 3. 26, mod ified – The words “provided as a means to protect persons from a hazard ” have been added. ] 3. 1 .56 safegu ardi ng protective measure using safeguards to protect persons from the hazards which cann ot reasonabl y be el iminated or from the risks which can not be su fficien tly reduced by in heren tly safe design measures [SOU RCE: I SO 1 21 00: 201 0, 3. 21 ] 3. 1 .57 safety fu n cti on fu nction of a machin e whose failure can resul t in an immed iate increase of the risk(s) [SOU RCE: I SO 1 21 00: 201 0, 3. 30; I EC 62061 : 2005, 3. 2. 1 5] 3. 1 .58 servi ci n g l evel level on which persons stand when operating or main tainin g the electrical equipmen t 3. 1 .59 sh ort-ci rcu it current overcurren t resu l ting from a short-circuit due to a fau lt or an incorrect conn ection in an electric circuit [SOU RCE: I EC 60050-441 : 1 984, 441 -1 1 -07] 3. 1 . 60 sh ort-ci rcu it curren t rati n g valu e of prospective short-circuit curren t that can be withstood by the electrical equ ipment for the total operating time (clearin g time) of the short-circu it protective device (SCPD) und er specified con ditions http://www.china-gauges.com/ [SOU RCE: I EC 61 439-1 : 201 1 , 3. 8. 1 0. 4, modified – The word “rated” is removed from the term, and the reference to “assembl y” removed from the definition . ] 3. 1 .61 ski l led person el ectrical l y ski l led person person with rel evan t train in g, ed ucation and experience to en able him or her to perceive risks and to avoid hazards associated with electricity [SOU RCE: I EC 60050-826: 2004, 826-1 8-01 , mod ified – The parentheses have been removed and “training” has been added. ] 3. 1 .62 suppl ier en tity (for example manu facturer, con tractor, instal ler, in tegrator) who provides equ ipmen t or services associated with the machine BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 26 – N ote 1 to en try: I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 Th e u ser org an i zati on m ay al so act i n th e capaci ty of a su ppl i er to i tsel f. 3.1 .63 switching device d evice design ed to make and /or break the curren t in one or more electric circuits N ote 1 to en try: A swi tchi n g d evi ce m ay perform on e or both of th ese acti on s. [SOU RCE: I EC 60050-441 : 1 984, 441 -1 4-01 ] 3.1 .64 uncontrolled stop stopping of machin e motion by removing electrical power to the machine actuators N ote 1 to en try: Th i s d efi ni ti on d oes not i m pl y an y parti cu l ar state of oth er stoppi ng d evi ces, for exam pl e m ech an i cal or h yd rau l i c brakes. 3.1 .65 user en tity who util izes the machin e an d its associated electrical equ ipment 3.2 Abbreviated terms AWG AC BDM CCS DC EM C EM I I FLS MMI PDS PELV RCD SPD SCPD SELV SLP STO American Wire Gau ge Al tern ating Cu rren t Basic Drive M odul e Cabl eless Control System Direct Current El ectro-Magn etic Compatibil ity El ectro-Magnetic I nterference I nsul ation Fault Location System M an-M achine interface Power Drive System Protective Extra-Low Voltage Resid ual Curren t protective Device Surge Protective Devices Short-Circu it Protective Device Safe Extra-Low Vol tage Safel y-Limited Position Safe Torqu e Off http://www.china-gauges.com/ 4 General requirements 4.1 General This stand ard specifies requiremen ts for the electrical equipmen t of machin es. The risks associated with the hazards rel evant to the electrical equipmen t shall be assessed as part of the overall requiremen ts for risk assessmen t of the machin e. This will : – – – identify the n eed for risk reduction ; an d determine ad equ ate risk reductions; and d etermine the necessary protective measures BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 – 27 – for persons who can be exposed to those hazards, while still main tain in g an appropriate performance of the machine and its eq uipmen t. H azard ous situations can resu lt from, bu t are not l imited to, the following causes: – – – – – – – – failures or faul ts in the electrical equipmen t resu lting in the possibility of electric shock, arc, or fire; failures or faults in control circu its (or componen ts an d devices associated with those circu its) resu lting in the mal functioning of the machin e; d istu rbances or disruptions in power sources as wel l as failures or fau l ts in the power circu its resulting in the mal fu nction ing of the machine; loss of con tin uity of circu its that can resul t in a failu re of a safety function , for example those that depen d on slid in g or roll ing con tacts; electrical d isturbances for example, electromagn etic, electrostatic either from outsid e the electrical eq uipment or in ternall y generated , resulting in the malfu nction ing of the machin e; release of stored energy (either electrical or mechan ical) resu l ting in, for exampl e, electric shock, un expected movement that can cause injury; acoustic noise and mechan ical vibration at levels that cause heal th problems to persons; su rface temperatures that can cause in ju ry. Safety measu res are a combination of the measures incorporated at the design stage an d those measu res requ ired to be implemen ted by the user. The d esign and d evelopmen t process shal l identify hazards and the risks arisin g from them. Where the hazards cannot be removed and /or the risks cannot be sufficiently reduced by inheren tl y safe design measures, protective measures (for example safeguard ing) shal l be provided to reduce the risk. Additional means (for exampl e, awareness means) shal l be provided where fu rther risk reduction is n ecessary. I n add ition , workin g proced ures that reduce risk can be necessary. I t is recommended that, where the user is known, Ann ex B be used to facilitate an exchan ge of in formation between the user and the supplier(s) on basic conditions and add itional user specifications rel ated to the electrical equ ipment. N OTE Th ose ad d i ti on al speci fi cati ons can : – provi d e ad d i tion al featu res th at are d epend en t on th e type of m ach i n e (or g rou p of m achi n es) an d th e appl i cati on; – faci l i tate m ai n ten an ce an d repai r; an d – i m prove th e rel iabi l i ty an d ease of operati on. 4.2 http://www.china-gauges.com/ Selection of equipment 4.2.1 General Electrical componen ts an d devices shal l : – – – be su itable for their intend ed use; and con form to relevan t I EC standards where such exist; an d be appl ied in accordance with the suppl ier’s instructions. 4.2.2 Switchgear I n addition to the requ iremen ts of I EC 60204-1 , d epend ing upon the machin e, its in tended use and its electrical equipmen t, the designer may sel ect parts of the electrical eq uipment of the machin e that are in compliance with relevant parts of the I EC 61 439 series (see also Annex F). BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 28 – 4.3 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 Electrical supply 4.3.1 General The electrical eq uipment shall be designed to operate correctl y with the cond itions of the supply: – – – as specified in 4. 3. 2 or 4. 3. 3, or as otherwise specified by the user, or as specified by the su pplier of a special source of su ppl y (see 4. 3. 4) 4.3.2 AC supplies Vol tage Freq uency H armonics Vol tage unbalance Vol tage in terruption Vol tage d ips 4.3.3 Steady state vol tage: 0, 9 to 1 , 1 of nominal voltage. 0, 99 to 1 , 01 of nominal frequency continu ousl y; 0, 98 to 1 , 02 short time. H armonic distortion not exceed in g 1 2 % of the total r. m. s. voltage between l ive con ductors for the sum of the 2nd through to the 30th harmonic. N either the voltage of the negative sequence compon en t nor the vol tage of the zero seq uence componen t in three-phase su pplies exceed in g 2 % of the positive seq uence componen t. Su ppl y in terrupted or at zero vol tage for n ot more than 3 ms at any rand om time in the su ppl y cycle with more than 1 s between successive interruptions. Vol tage d ips n ot exceedin g 20 % of the rms vol tage of the suppl y for more than on e cycl e with more than 1 s between successive d ips. DC supplies From batteries: Voltage Vol tage in terruption 0, 85 to 1 , 1 5 of nominal voltage; 0, 7 to 1 , 2 of n omin al vol tage in the case of battery-operated vehicles. N ot exceedin g 5 ms. From converting equ ipmen t: Voltage Vol tage in terruption 0, 9 to 1 , 1 of n omin al voltage. http://www.china-gauges.com/ N ot exceeding 20 ms with more than 1 s between successive interruptions. N OTE Th i s i s a vari ati on to I EC Gu i d e 1 06 to ensu re proper operati on of el ectroni c eq u i pm en t. Ripple (peak-to-peak) 4.3.4 N ot exceedin g 0, 1 5 of nominal voltage. Special supply systems For special su ppl y systems (e. g. on-board generators, DC bus, etc. ) the l imits given in 4. 3. 2 and 4. 3. 3 may be exceed ed provided that the eq uipmen t is designed to operate correctl y with those conditions. 4.4 4.4.1 Physical environment and operating conditions General The electrical equ ipment shall be suitable for the physical en vironmen t and operating cond itions of its in tend ed use. The requ iremen ts of 4. 4. 2 to 4. 4. 8 cover the physical environ men t and operating con ditions of the majority of machines covered by this part of BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 – 29 – I EC 60204. When special cond itions appl y or the l imits specified are exceeded , an exchan ge of in formation between user an d supplier (see 4. 1 ) can be n ecessary. 4.4.2 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) The el ectrical equ ipment shall not generate electromagnetic disturbances above levels that are appropriate for its intended operatin g en viron men t. I n ad dition , the electrical equ ipmen t shal l have a su fficien t level of immun ity to electromagnetic disturbances so that it can function in its inten ded en vironmen t. I mmu nity and/or emission tests are requ ired on the electrical equipmen t u nl ess the fol lowing cond itions are ful filled : • the incorporated devices an d components compl y with the EM C requ iremen ts for the in tended EMC en vironmen t specified in the relevan t product standard (or generic standard where no product standard exists), and ; • the electrical instal lation and wiring are consisten t with the instructions provided by the su pplier of the devices and componen ts with regard to mu tu al in fluences, (cabling , screen in g, earthing etc. ) or with in formative Annex H if such instructions are n ot available from the suppl ier. N OTE Th e g en eri c EM C stan d ard s I EC 61 000-6-1 or I EC 61 000-6-2 an d I EC 61 000-6-3 or I EC 61 000-6-4 g i ve g en eral EM C em i ssi on an d i mm u n i ty l i mi ts. 4.4.3 Ambient air temperature Electrical eq uipmen t shal l be capabl e of operating correctl y in the intended ambien t air temperatu re. The minimu m requ irement for al l el ectrical equipment is correct operation in ambien t air temperatu res ou tside of enclosures (cabinet or box) between + 5 °C an d + 40 °C. 4.4.4 Humidity The electrical equ ipment shall be capable of operatin g correctl y when the relative humid ity does not exceed 50 % at a maximum temperature of + 40 °C. H igher relative humid ities are permitted at l ower temperatures (for example 90 % at 20 °C). H armful effects of occasion al cond ensation shall be avoided by design of the equipment or, where necessary, by add ition al measu res (for example buil t-in heaters, air con ditioners, drain hol es). 4.4.5 Altitude El ectrical equ ipmen t shall be capable of operatin g correctl y at al tituhttp://www.china-gauges.com/ des up to 1 000 m above mean sea level. For equipment to be used at higher altitudes, it is necessary to take into account changes in parameters for example, the reduction of: – – – the dielectric strength, an d; the switching capabil ity of the devices, and ; the cool ing effect of the air. Other parameters of different components can also alter with altitude. I t is recommen ded that the man u facturer is consul ted regarding the correction factors to be used where the factors are not specified in product data. 4.4.6 Contaminants El ectrical equ ipmen t shal l be adequately protected against the ingress of solids and l iqu ids (see 1 1 . 3). BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 30 – I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 The electrical equ ipment shall be ad equ ately protected against contaminan ts (for exampl e d ust, acids, corrosive gases, sal ts) that can be presen t in the physical environ men t in which the electrical eq uipmen t is to be instal led . 4.4.7 Ionizing and non-ionizing radiation When equ ipment is subject to radiation (for example microwave, ul traviolet, lasers, X-rays), add itional measures shall be taken to avoid malfunction ing of the equ ipment and accelerated d eterioration of the insu lation . 4.4.8 Vibration, shock, and bump U n desirable effects of vibration , shock and bump (includ ing those generated by the machin e and its associated equipment and those created by the physical environment) shall be avoided by the sel ection of suitable equ ipmen t, by moun tin g it away from the machin e, or by provision of an ti-vibration moun tings. 4.5 Transportation and storage El ectrical equ ipmen t shall be designed to withstand , or su itable precautions shall be taken to protect against, the effects of transportation an d storage temperatu res within a range of –25 °C to + 55 °C an d for short periods not exceed ing 24 h at u p to + 70 °C. Suitabl e means shall be provided to prevent damage from humid ity, vibration , and shock. N OTE El ectri cal eq u i pm en t su scepti bl e to d am ag e at l ow tem peratu res i ncl u d es PVC i nsu l ated cabl es. 4.6 Provisions for handling H eavy and bulky electrical equipmen t that has to be removed from the machine for transport, or that is ind ependen t of the machine, shall be provid ed with su itable means for handl ing, includ in g where n ecessary means for hand l ing by cranes or similar equ ipmen t. 5 5.1 Incoming supply conductor terminations and devices for disconnecting and switching off Incoming supply conductor terminations I t is recommended that, where practicabl e, the electrical equ ipmen t of a machine is connected to a single incoming suppl y. Where another suppl y is n ecessary for certain parts of the equipmen t (for example, electron ic eq uipmen t that operates at a different vol tage), that suppl y shou ld be d erived , as far as is practicabl e, from devices (forhttp://www.china-gauges.com/ example, transformers, converters) forming part of the electrical equ ipmen t of the machine. For large complex machin ery there can be a need for more than one incoming su pply depend ing upon the site su pply arrangemen ts (see 5. 3. 1 ). U nless a plug is provided with the machine for the connection to the supply (see 5. 3. 2 e)), it is recommended that the supply con ductors are terminated at the supply disconnectin g d evice. Where a neu tral conductor is used it shall be clearl y ind icated in the techn ical documen tation of the machin e, such as in the instal lation d iagram and in the circuit diagram, an d a separate insu lated terminal, labell ed N in accordance with 1 6. 1 , shall be provided for the neu tral conductor. The neu tral terminal may be provided as part of the suppl y d isconnectin g d evice. There shall be no conn ection between the n eu tral con ductor an d the protective bond ing circu it inside the electrical equ ipment. Exception : a conn ection may be made between the n eu tral terminal and the PE termin al at the poin t of the connection of the electrical equ ipmen t to a TN -C supply system. BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 – 31 – For machines su pplied from paral lel sources, the requ iremen ts of I EC 60364-1 for mul tipl e source systems appl y. Terminals for the incoming supply con nection shal l be clearl y id en tified in accord ance with I EC 60445. The termin al for the extern al protective conductor shal l be iden tified in accordance with 5. 2. 5.2 Terminal for connection of the external protective conductor For each incoming suppl y, a termin al shal l be provided in the same compartment as the associated line cond uctor terminals for con nection of the machine to the external protective conductor. The terminal shal l be of such a size as to enable the conn ection of an external protective copper cond uctor with a cross-sectional area determin ed in rel ation to the size of the associated l in e conductors in accordance with Tabl e 1 . Table 1 – Minimum cross-sectional area of copper protective conductors Cross-secti onal area of line conductors S mm2 M inimum cross-sectional area of the correspondi ng protecti ve conductor (PE) Sp mm2 S ≤ 16 S 1 6 < S ≤ 35 16 S > 35 S/2 Where an external protective con ductor of a material other than copper is used , the terminal size and type shall be sel ected accord in gl y. At each incoming supply poin t, the terminal for connection of extern al protective conductor shal l be marked or labelled with the letters PE (see I EC 60445). 5.3 Supply disconnecting (isolating) device 5.3.1 General A supply d isconnectin g d evice shal l be provided : – for each incoming supply to (a) machin e(s); http://www.china-gauges.com/ N OTE Th e i ncom i ng su ppl y can be con n ected d i rectl y to th e su ppl y d i sconnecti n g d evi ce of th e mach i ne or to th e su ppl y d i scon n ecti n g d evi ce of a feed er system of the m achi n e. Feed er system s of m achi n es can i n cl u d e con d u ctor wi res, con d u ctor bars, sl i p-ri n g assem bl i es, fl exi bl e cabl e system s (reel ed , festoon ed ) or i n d u cti ve power su ppl y system s. – for each on-board power su ppl y. The supply d isconnecting device shal l d isconn ect (isol ate) the electrical equ ipmen t of the machin e from the su pply when required (for example for work on the machine, including the electrical equipmen t). Where two or more suppl y d iscon necting devices are provided , protective in terl ocks for their correct operation shall also be provided in order to prevent a hazard ous situation, includ in g d amage to the machine or to the work in progress. 5.3.2 Type The su ppl y disconnecting device shal l be one of the foll owing types: BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 32 – I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 a) switch-discon nector, with or without fuses, in accord ance with I EC 60947-3, u tilization category AC-23B or DC-23B; b) con trol an d protective switching d evice suitable for isolation , in accordance with I EC 60947-6-2; c) a circuit-breaker su itable for isolation in accordance with I EC 60947-2; d) an y other switching device in accord ance with an I EC product standard for that device an d which meets the isol ation req u iremen ts an d the appropriate u tilization category and /or specified end urance requ iremen ts defin ed in the product stan dard ; e) a pl ug/socket combination for a flexibl e cable suppl y. 5.3.3 Requirements Where the su pply d isconn ecting d evice is one of the types specified in 5. 3. 2 a) to d) it shal l fu lfil all of the followin g requ iremen ts: – – – – – – isolate the electrical equipmen t from the su pply and have one OFF (isolated) and one ON posi ti on marked wi th "O" an d "I " (symbol s I EC 6041 7-5008 (2002-1 0) an d I EC 6041 7-5007 (2002-1 0), see 1 0. 2. 2); have a visible con tact gap or a position ind icator which cannot in dicate OFF (isol ated) u n til all con tacts are actually open an d the requiremen ts for the isolatin g function have been satisfied ; have an operating means (see 5. 3. 4); be provid ed with a means permitting it to be locked in the OFF (isolated) position (for example by padl ocks). When so l ocked, remote as well as local cl osing shall be preven ted ; d isconnect all l ive conductors of its power suppl y circuit. H owever, for TN suppl y systems, the neu tral con ductor may or may n ot be disconnected except in cou n tries where d isconnection of the neu tral cond uctor (when used) is compulsory; have a breakin g capacity su fficien t to in terrupt the curren t of the largest motor when stal led together with the sum of the normal ru nn in g cu rren ts of all other motors and other l oads. The calculated breaking capacity may be reduced by the use of a proven diversity factor. Where motor(s) are suppl ied by con verter(s) or similar devices, the calcul ation shou ld take in to accoun t the possible effect on the requ ired breaking capacity. Where the su ppl y d isconn ecting device is a plug/socket combination , it shal l compl y with the requ iremen ts of 1 3. 4. 5 an d shal l have the breaking capacity, or be in terlocked with a switching device that has a breaking capacity, su fficien t to in terru pt the cu rren t of the largest motor when stall ed together with the su m of the n ormal running curren ts of al l other motors http://www.china-gauges.com/ and other loads. The cal culated breakin g capacity may be reduced by the use of a proven diversity factor. Where the in terl ocked switchin g device is electrical ly operated (for example a con tactor) it shall have an appropriate utilisation category. Where motor(s) are supplied by con verter(s) or similar devices, the calculation shou ld take in to accoun t the possible effect on the required breakin g capacity. N OTE A su i tabl y rated pl u g an d socket-ou tl et, cabl e cou pl er, or appl i ance cou pl er, i n accord an ce wi th I EC 60309-1 can fu l fi l th ese req u i remen ts. Where the su pply d isconnecting device is a plug/socket combination , a switching device with an appropriate u tilisation category shal l be provided for switching the machine on and off. This can be achieved by the use of the in terlocked switchin g d evice described above. 5.3.4 Operating means of the supply disconnecting device The operating means (for example, a hand le) of the supply d isconnecting device shal l be external to the enclosure of the electrical equipmen t. BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 – 33 – Exception : power-operated switchgear need not be provid ed with a hand le outside the encl osure where other means (e. g. pushbu ttons) are provided to open the supply d isconnecting device from ou tside the enclosu re. The operating means of the suppl y d isconnecting device shall be easily accessible and located between 0, 6 m and 1 , 9 m above the servicin g level . An u pper l imit of 1 , 7 m is recommended . N OTE Th e d i recti on of operati on i s g i ven i n I EC 61 31 0-3. Where the external operating means is intended for emergency operation , see 1 0. 7. 3 or 1 0. 8. 3. Where the external operatin g means is not in tend ed for emergency operations: – – it is recommended that it be colou red BLACK or GREY (see 1 0. 2) a suppl emen tary cover or door that can be readily open ed withou t the use of a key or tool may be provided , for example for protection against en viron men tal cond itions or mechan ical d amage. Such a cover/d oor shall clearl y show that it provides access to the operating means. This can be achieved , for example, by use of the rel evan t symbol I EC 6041 7-61 69-1 (201 2-08) (Figure 2) or I EC 6041 7-61 69-2 (201 2-08), (Figure 3). Figu re 2 – Disconnector isolator Figu re 3 – Disconnecting circuit breaker 5.3.5 Excepted circuits http://www.china-gauges.com/ The fol lowing circuits n eed not be d isconnected by the supply d isconnecting device: – – – – l ighting circuits for lighting needed durin g main tenance or repair; socket ou tlets for the exclusive connection of repair or maintenance tools and equ ipmen t (for example hand drills, test equ ipment) (see 1 5. 1 ); u ndervol tage protection circu its that are only provid ed for au tomatic tripping i n the event of suppl y failu re; circu its supplying equ ipmen t that shou ld n ormall y remain en ergized for correct operation (for example temperatu re con trolled measurin g devices, heaters, program storage d evices). I t is recommen ded , however, that such circu its be provid ed with their own d isconnectin g device. Control circu its suppl ied via another suppl y disconnectin g d evice, regardl ess of whether that disconnecting device is l ocated in the electrical equ ipment or in another machin e or other electrical equ ipment, need not be discon nected by the suppl y d isconnectin g device of the electrical equ ipmen t. BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 34 – I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 Where excepted circu its are n ot disconnected by the suppl y disconnecting device: – – permanen t warn ing label(s) shal l be appropriatel y placed in proximity to the operatin g means of the suppl y d isconnectin g d evice to d raw atten tion to the hazard ; a correspond ing statemen t shall be included in the main ten ance manu al, and one or more of the fol lowing shall apply: • the con ductors are iden tified by colour takin g in to account the recommendation of 1 3. 2. 4; • excepted circu its are separated from other circu its; • excepted circuits are iden tified by perman ent warn in g label(s). 5.4 Devi ces for removal of power for preventi on of unexpected start-u p Devices for removal of power for the preven tion of u nexpected start-u p shall be provid ed where a start-up of the machine or part of the machine can create a hazard (for example during main tenance). Such devices shal l be appropriate and con ven ien t for the in tend ed use, be suitabl y placed , an d readily iden tifiable as to their fu nction and pu rpose. Where their fu nction and purpose is n ot otherwise obvious (e. g. by their location) these devices shall be marked to ind icate the exten t of removal of power. N OTE 1 Th i s part of I EC 60204 d oes n ot ad d ress al l provi si on s for preven ti on of u nexpected start u p. Fu rth er i n formati on i s provi d ed i n I SO 1 41 1 8. N OTE 2 Removal of power m ean s rem oval of th e con necti on to th e sou rce of el ectri cal en erg y bu t d oes n ot i m pl y i sol ati on . The supply disconnecting device or other devices in accordance with 5. 3. 2 may be used for preven tion of u nexpected start-u p. Discon nectors, withdrawable fuse links and withdrawable l inks may be used for protection of u nexpected start-up on ly if they are l ocated in an enclosed electrical operating area (see 3. 1 . 23). Devices that d o not fu lfil the isolation function (for example a contactor switched off by a control circuit, or Power Drive System (PDS) with a Safe Torq ue Off (STO) function in accord ance with I EC 61 800-5-2) may on ly be used for preven tion of u nexpected start-up d uring tasks such as: – – – inspections; adj ustmen ts; work on the electrical equ ipmen t where: http://www.china-gauges.com/ • there is n o hazard arising from el ectric shock (see Clause 6) and burn ; • the switching off means remains effective throu ghou t the work; • the work is of a minor n ature (for exampl e, repl acemen t of plug-in devices withou t distu rbing existing wiring). The selection of a d evice will be depend ent on the risk assessmen t, taking into accoun t the in tended use of the device, and the persons who are in tended to operate them. 5.5 Devi ces for i solati n g electri cal equi pmen t Devices shal l be provided for isolating (d isconnectin g) the electrical equ ipmen t or part(s) of the electrical equ ipment to enable work to be carried ou t when it is de-energised an d isolated. Such devices shall be: – – appropriate and con ven ien t for the intended use; su itabl y placed ; BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 – – 35 – read ily iden tifiable as to which part(s) or circuit(s) of the equipmen t is served . Where their fu nction and pu rpose is not otherwise obvious (e. g. by their location) these d evices shal l be marked to indicate the exten t of the eq uipmen t that they isolate. The supply d isconnecting d evice (see 5. 3) may, in some cases, fu l fil that fu nction. H owever, where it is necessary to work on individu al parts of the el ectrical eq uipmen t of a machin e, or on on e of the machin es fed by a common conductor bar, conductor wire or inductive power su ppl y system, a d isconn ecting device shall be provided for each part, or for each machin e, requiring separate isol ation . I n ad dition to the supply d isconn ecting device, the fol lowing devices that fulfil the isolation fu nction may be provided for this pu rpose: – – d evices described in 5. 3. 2; d isconnectors, withdrawabl e fuse links and withdrawable links only if located in an encl osed electrical operatin g area (see 3. 1 . 23) and relevan t in formation is provided with the electrical equipment (see Clause 1 7). 5.6 Protection against unauthorized, inadvertent and/or mistaken connection Where the d evices described in 5. 4 and 5. 5 are located ou tsid e an enclosed electrical operating area they shal l be equ ipped with means to secure them in the OFF position (disconn ected state), (for exampl e by provisions for pad locking, trapped key in terlockin g). When so secu red , remote as well as l ocal recon nection shal l be preven ted . Where the d evices described in 5. 4 and 5. 5 are located inside an encl osed electrical operating area other means of protection against reconnection (for example warn ing l abels) can be su fficien t. H owever, when a plug/socket combin ation accord ing to 5. 3. 2 e) is so positioned that it can be kept un der the immed iate supervision of the person carryin g ou t the work, means for securing in the disconnected state n eed not be provided. 6 Protection against electric shock 6.1 General The electrical equ ipment shal l provide protection of persons against electric shock by: – – basic protection (see 6. 2 and 6. 4), and ; faul t protection (see 6. 3 and 6. 4). http://www.china-gauges.com/ The measures for protection given in 6. 2, 6. 3, and, for PELV, in 6. 4, are a selection from I EC 60364-4-41 . Where those measures are not practicable, for example d ue to the physical or operational conditions, other measu res from I EC 60364-4-41 may be used (e. g. SELV). 6.2 6.2.1 Basic protection General For each circu it or part of the electrical equ ipment, the measu res of either 6. 2. 2 or 6. 2. 3 an d, where applicabl e, 6. 2. 4 shal l be applied . Exception : where those measures are not appropriate, other measures for basic protection (for example by usin g barriers, by placing ou t of reach, usin g obstacles, using construction or instal lation techn iqu es that preven t access) as d efined in I EC 60364-4-41 may be applied (see also 6. 2. 5 an d 6. 2. 6). BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 36 – I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 Where the equ ipment is located in pl aces open to all persons, which can include chil dren , measures of either 6. 2. 2 with a minimum degree of protection against con tact with live parts correspond ing to I P4X or I PXXD (see I EC 60529), or 6. 2. 3 shal l be applied . 6.2.2 Protection by enclosures Live parts shal l be located insid e enclosu res that provide protection against con tact with live parts of at least I P2X or I PXXB (see I EC 60529). Where the top surfaces of the enclosure are readily accessible, the min imum degree of protection against con tact with live parts provided by the top su rfaces shall be I P4X or I PXXD. Open in g an enclosure (i. e. open in g doors, l ids, covers, and the l ike) shal l be possible only under one of the following cond itions: a) The use of a key or tool is n ecessary for access. N OTE 1 Th e u se of a key or tool i s i nten d ed to restri ct access to ski l l ed or i nstructed person s (see 1 7. 2 f)). Al l l ive parts, (inclu ding those on the insid e of d oors) that are likel y to be touched when resetting or ad justing devices in tend ed for such operations while the equipmen t is still connected , shal l be protected against contact to at least I P2X or I PXXB. Other live parts on the inside of doors shal l be protected against unin tention al d irect con tact to at least I P1 X or I PXXA. b) The d isconnection of live parts inside the enclosure before the enclosu re can be opened. This may be accomplished by in terlockin g the d oor with a d iscon necting device (for exampl e, the suppl y d isconnectin g d evice) so that the d oor can on l y be opened when the disconnecting device is open an d so that the discon necting d evice can only be closed when the door is closed . Exception : a key or tool as prescribed by the su ppl ier can be used to d efeat the in terlock provided that the foll owing conditions are met: – it is possible at all times while the interlock is defeated to open the d isconnecting d evice an d lock the d isconnectin g device in the OFF (isolated) position or otherwise preven t un au thorised closure of the d isconnecting device; – u pon closin g the door, the in terlock is au tomatically restored ; – al l l ive parts, (incl ud ing those on the inside of doors) that are l ikel y to be touched when resetting or adj usting d evices in tended for such operations while the equ ipment is still connected , are protected against unin ten tional con tact with live parts to at least I P2X or I PXXB and other l ive parts on the inside of d oors are protected against uninten tion al con tact to at l east I P1 X or I PXXA; http://www.china-gauges.com/ – rel evan t information abou t the proced ures for the defeat of the in terl ock is provided with the instructions for use of the electrical equipmen t (see Clause 1 7). – means are provided to restrict access to live parts behin d d oors that are not d irectly in terlocked with the d isconnecting means to skil led or instructed persons. (See 1 7. 2 b)). All parts that are still live after switchin g off the d isconnecting d evice(s) (see 5. 3. 5) shal l be protected against direct con tact to at least I P2X or I PXXB (see I EC 60529). Such parts shal l be marked with a warning sign in accord ance with 1 6. 2. 1 (see also 1 3. 2. 4 for iden tification of cond uctors by col our), except for: – parts that can be live onl y because of con nection to in terlocking circu its an d that are d istinguished by colou r as poten tial ly live in accordance with 1 3. 2. 4; – the supply terminals of the suppl y d isconnecting d evice when the l atter is mou nted alone in a separate enclosure. c) Open in g withou t the use of a key or a tool and withou t discon nection of live parts shall be possible only when all l ive parts are protected against contact to at least I P2X or I PXXB (see I EC 60529). Where barriers provide this protection , either they shal l require a tool for BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 – 37 – their removal or all live parts protected by them shal l be au tomaticall y d isconnected when the barrier is removed . Where protection against contact is achieved in accordance with 6. 2. 2 c), and a hazard can be caused by man ual actuation of devices (for exampl e man ual closing of contactors or relays), such actu ation shou ld be preven ted by barriers or obstacles that req uire a tool for their removal . 6.2.3 Protection by insu lation of live parts Live parts protected by insul ation shal l be completely covered with insu lation that can onl y be removed by destruction. Such insu lation shal l be capable of withstanding the mechan ical, chemical, electrical , and thermal stresses to which it can be subj ected und er normal operatin g cond itions. N OTE Pai n ts, varn ish es, l acq u ers, and si m i l ar prod u cts al on e are g en eral l y con si d ered to be i n ad eq u ate for protecti on agai n st el ectri c sh ock u n d er n ormal operati n g cond i ti on s. 6.2.4 Protection against residual voltages Live parts havin g a resid ual vol tage greater than 60 V when the supply is disconn ected shall be d ischarged to 60 V or less within a time period of 5 s provid ed that this rate of discharge does not in terfere with the proper function ing of the equipmen t. Exempted from this requ iremen t are componen ts having a stored charge of 60 µ C or less. Where this specified rate of d ischarge would interfere with the proper functionin g of the eq uipmen t, a d urabl e warning notice drawing atten tion to the hazard and stating the delay requ ired before the enclosure may be opened shal l be d isplayed at an easily visible location on or immediately adj acent to the enclosure that con tains the live parts. I n the case of plugs or similar devices, the withdrawal of which resul ts in the exposure of conductors (for example pins), the d ischarge time to 60 V shall not exceed 1 s, otherwise such cond uctors shall be protected to at least I P2X or I PXXB. I f n either a discharge time of 1 s n or a protection of at least I P2X or I PXXB can be achieved (for example in the case of removable collectors on conductor wires, conductor bars, or sl ip-ring assemblies, see 1 2. 7. 4), add itional switching devices or an appropriate warning, for example a warn ing sign d rawing atten tion to the hazard and stating the delay required shall be provided . When the eq uipmen t is located in places open to all persons, which can includ e children, warn ings are not su fficien t and therefore a minimu m d egree of protection against contact with live parts to I P4X or I PXXD is requ ired . N OTE Freq u en cy con verters an d DC bu s su ppl i es cou l d h ave typi cal l y a l on g er d i sch arg e ti m e th an 5 s. 6.2.5 Protection by barriers For protection by barriers, the req uirements of I EC 60364-4-41 shallhttp://www.china-gauges.com/ appl y. 6.2.6 Protection by placing out of reach or protection by obstacles For protection by pl acing ou t of reach, the requiremen ts of I EC 60364-4-41 shal l apply. For protection by obstacles, the requ iremen ts of I EC 60364-4-41 shall appl y. For con ductor wire systems or cond uctor bar systems with a degree of protection l ess than I P2X or I PXXB, see 1 2. 7. 1 . 6.3 6.3.1 Fault protection General Faul t protection (3. 31 ) is in tend ed to prevent hazardous situ ations due to an insulation fau l t between live parts an d exposed conductive parts. For each circu it or part of the electrical equipmen t, at l east on e of the measu res in accordance with 6. 3. 2 to 6. 3. 3 shal l be applied : BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 38 – – – I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 measures to preven t the occurrence of a touch voltage (6. 3. 2); or au tomatic disconnection of the suppl y before the time of contact with a touch vol tage can become hazardous (6. 3. 3). N OTE 1 The risk of harmful physiological effects from touch voltages depends upon a number of factors. These include but are not limited to; value of touch voltage, duration of possible exposure, environmental factors, skin condition N OTE 2 I EC 61 1 40 provi d es i n form ati on abou t cl asses of eq u i pm en t an d protecti ve provi si ons. 6. 3. 2 6. 3. 2. 1 P re ve n t i o n o f t h e o c c u rre n c e o f a t o u c h vo l t a g e G e n e ra l M easures to prevent the occurrence of a touch vol tage include the followin g: – – provision of class I I equ ipmen t or by equivalen t insu lation ; electrical separation . 6. 3. 2. 2 P ro t e c t i o n b y p ro v i s i o n o f c l a s s I I e q u i p m e n t o r b y e q u i va l e n t i n s u l a t i o n This measure is intend ed to prevent the occu rrence of touch vol tages on the accessible parts through a fau l t in the basic insu lation . This protection is provided by one or more of the following: – – – class I I electrical devices or apparatus (dou ble insu lation , rein forced insu lation or by equ ivalen t insu lation in accordance with I EC 61 1 40); switchgear and control gear assemblies havin g total insul ation in accordance with I EC 61 439-1 ; su pplemen tary or reinforced insulation in accordance with I EC 60364-4-41 . 6. 3. 2. 3 P ro t e c t i o n b y e l e c t ri c a l s e p a ra t i o n El ectrical separation of an individ ual circu it is intend ed to prevent a touch vol tage through con tact with exposed con ductive parts that can be energized by a fau l t in the basic insu lation of the live parts of that circu it. For this type of protection , the requiremen ts of I EC 60364-4-41 appl y. 6. 3. 3 P ro t e c t i o n b y a u t o m a t i c d i s c o n n e c t i o n of su ppl y http://www.china-gauges.com/ Automatic d isconnection of the su pply of an y circu it affected by an insu lation fau lt is intend ed to preven t a hazardous situation resulting from a touch vol tage. This measure consists of the in terruption of on e or more of the line cond uctors by the au tomatic operation of a protective device in case of a fau lt. This in terruption shall occur within a su fficien tl y short time to l imit the duration of a touch voltage to a time within the l imits specified in Annex A for TN and TT systems. This measure necessitates co-ordination between : – – – the type of supply system, the supply source impedance and the earthing system; the impedance values of the d ifferen t el emen ts of the line and of the associated faul t cu rren t paths throu gh the protective bond ing circu it; the characteristics of the protective devices that detect insu lation fau lt(s). N OTE 1 1 8. 2. Detai l s of veri fi cati on of con d i ti on s for protecti on by au tom ati c d i sconn ection of su ppl y are provi d ed i n This protective measure comprises both: BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 – – – 39 – protective bond ing of exposed conductive parts (see 8. 2. 3), and one of the following: a) I n TN systems, the fol lowing protective devices may be used : • overcurren t protective devices; • residual curren t protective devices (RCDs) and associated overcurren t protective d evice(s). N OTE 2 Th e preventi ve m ai n ten ance can be en h an ced by u se of a resi d u al cu rren t mon i tori n g d evi ce, RCM , com pl yi ng wi th I EC 62020. b) in TT systems, either: • RCDs and associated overcurren t protective device(s) to in itiate the automatic d isconnection of the su ppl y on d etection of an insul ation fau lt from a live part to exposed cond uctive parts or to earth, or • overcurren t protective devices may be used for fault protection provid ed a su itabl y low value of the fau l t loop impedance Zs (see A. 2. 2. 3) is permanen tl y and reliabl y assured; N OTE 3 Th e preventi ve m ai n ten ance can be en h an ced by u se of a resi d u al cu rren t mon i tori n g d evi ce, RCM , com pl yi ng wi th I EC 62020. c) I n I T systems the relevan t requ iremen ts of I EC 60364-4-41 shall be fulfilled . During an insu lation fau l t, an acoustic and optical signal shal l be sustain ed . After annunciation , the acoustic sign al may then be manuall y mu ted . This can req uire an agreement between the supplier and user regard in g the provision of insu lation mon itoring d evices and /or insu lation fau lt location system(s). N OTE 4 I n l arg e m achi n es, th e provi si on of an i nsu l ati on fau l t l ocati on system (I FLS) i n accord ance with I EC 61 557-9 can faci l i tate m ai n ten ance. Where automatic d iscon nection is provided in accord ance with a), an d d iscon nection within the time specified in A. 1 . 1 can not be assu red , su pplemen tary protective bon ding shall be provided as n ecessary to meet the requiremen ts of A. 1 . 3. Where a power drive system (PDS) is provided, faul t protection shal l be provid ed for those circu its of the power drive system that are supplied by the converter. Where this protection is n ot provided within the con verter, the necessary protection measures shal l be in accordance with the converter man ufacturer’s instructions. 6.4 Protection by the use of PELV 6.4.1 General requirements http://www.china-gauges.com/ The use of PELV (Protective Extra-Low Voltage) is to protect persons against el ectric shock from ind irect con tact and limited area direct con tact (see 8. 2. 1 ). PELV circu its shall satisfy all of the fol lowin g cond itions: a) the nominal voltage shal l n ot exceed : • 25 V AC r. m. s. or 60 V ripple-free DC when the equipmen t is normally used in dry locations and when large area contact of live parts with the human body is n ot expected ; or • 6 V AC r. m. s. or 1 5 V rippl e-free DC in al l other cases; N OTE "Ri ppl e-free" i s conven ti on al l y d efi n ed for a si n u soi d al ri ppl e vol tag e as a ri ppl e con ten t of n ot m ore th an 1 0 % r. m. s. b) one side of the circu it or one point of the source of the su ppl y of that circuit shal l be connected to the protective bond in g circuit; c) live parts of PELV circu its shal l be electrical ly separated from other live circu its. Electrical separation shall be not less than that required between the primary an d second ary circuits of a safety isolating transformer (see I EC 61 558-1 and I EC 61 558-2-6 ); BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 40 – I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 d ) conductors of each PELV circuit shal l be physical ly separated from those of an y other circu it. When this requ irement is impracticable, the insulation provisions of 1 3. 1 . 3 shal l apply; e) plu gs an d socket-ou tl ets for a PELV circuit shall con form to the following: • plu gs shal l not be able to en ter socket-ou tl ets of other vol tage systems; • socket-outl ets shal l not admit plu gs of other vol tage systems. 6.4.2 Sources for PELV The source for PELV shal l be one of the foll owing: – – – – 7 a safety isolatin g transformer in accordance with I EC 61 558-1 and I EC 61 558-2-6; a source of cu rren t provid ing a d egree of safety eq uivalen t to that of the safety isolating transformer (for example a motor generator with wind in g provid ing equ ivalen t isol ation); an electrochemical source (for example a battery) or an other source in depend en t of a higher vol tage circuit (for exampl e a diesel -driven gen erator); an electronic power supply con formin g to appropriate stan dards specifying measures to be taken to ensu re that, even in the case of an in tern al fau l t, the voltage at the outgoing terminals cannot exceed the values specified in 6. 4. 1 . Protection of equipment 7.1 General This Clause 7 details the measures to be taken to protect equipmen t against the effects of: – – – – – – – – overcurrent arisin g from a short-circuit; overload and /or loss of cooling of motors; abnormal temperature; loss of or reduction in the suppl y vol tage; overspeed of machin es/machin e elemen ts; earth fau lt/resid ual curren t; incorrect phase sequence; overvol tage d ue to l ightning and switchin g surges. 7.2 7.2.1 Overcurrent protection http://www.china-gauges.com/ General Overcurren t protection shal l be provided where the curren t in any circu it can exceed either the rating of any component or the curren t carrying capacity of the conductors, whichever is the l esser value. The ratings or settings to be selected are detailed in 7. 2. 1 0. 7.2.2 Supply conductors U n less otherwise specified by the user, the supplier of the electrical equ ipmen t is not responsible for provid ing the supply conductors and the overcurren t protective device for the su ppl y con ductors to the electrical eq uipmen t. The supplier of the electrical eq uipmen t shal l state in the install ation documen ts the d ata n ecessary for cond uctor d imension in g (includ ing the maximum cross-sectional area of the su ppl y conductor that can be conn ected to the terminals of the el ectrical eq uipmen t) an d for selectin g the overcurren t protective device (see 7. 2. 1 0 and 1 7). BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 7.2.3 – 41 – Power circuits Devices for d etection and interruption of overcurren t, selected in accordance with 7. 2. 1 0, shall be appl ied to each l ive conductor incl ud in g circu its su pplying control circuit transformers. The following con ductors, as applicabl e, shal l not be d isconn ected withou t d isconnectin g all associated l ive cond uctors: – – – the neu tral conductor of AC power circuits; the earthed conductor of DC power circu its; DC power conductors bonded to exposed conductive parts of mobile machines. Where the cross-sectional area of the neutral con ductor is at l east equ al to or equ ivalen t to that of the l in e cond uctors, it is not n ecessary to provide overcurrent detection for the neu tral conductor nor a d isconnectin g device for that con ductor. For a neu tral con ductor with a crosssectional area smaller than that of the associated line conductors, the measures detailed in 524 of I EC 60364-5-52: 2009 shal l apply. I n I T systems, it is recommend ed that the n eutral conductor is not used . H owever, where a neu tral cond uctor is used , the measures detailed in 431 . 2. 2 of I EC 60364-4-43: 2008 shall apply. 7.2.4 Control circuits Conductors of con trol circuits d irectly conn ected to the suppl y vol tage shall be protected against overcurren t in accordance with 7. 2. 3. Conductors of control circuits supplied by a transformer or DC su ppl y shal l be protected against overcu rrent (see also 9. 4. 3. 1 . 1 ): – – in con trol circu its con nected to the protective bond in g circuit, by inserting an overcurren t protective device in to the switched conductor; in con trol circu its n ot conn ected to the protective bond ing circu it; • where all con trol circuits of the equipmen t have the same curren t carrying capacity, by inserting an overcurren t protective device in to the switched conductor, or; where differen t con trol circuits of the equipmen t have differen t cu rren t carrying capacity, by insertin g an overcurrent protective device in to both switched an d common conductors of each con trol circu it. Exception: Where the su ppl y unit provides curren t limiting below thehttp://www.china-gauges.com/ curren t carrying capacity of the conductors in a circu it and below the cu rrent rating of connected components, no separate overcurrent protective device is requ ired . • 7.2.5 Socket outlets and their associated conductors Overcurren t protection shal l be provided for the circuits feeding the general purpose socket ou tl ets in ten ded primarily for suppl ying power to main tenance eq uipmen t. Overcurrent protective devices shal l be provided in the un earthed live conductors of each circuit feed in g such socket ou tlets. See also 1 5. 1 . 7.2.6 Lighting circuits Al l unearthed cond uctors of circu its su ppl ying lighting shal l be protected against the effects of short-circu its by the provision of overcurren t devices separate from those protectin g other circu its. BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 42 – 7.2.7 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 Transformers Transformers shall be protected by an overcurrent protective device having a type an d setting in accordance with the transformer manu facturer’s instructions. Such protection shal l (see also 7. 2. 1 0): – – avoid nu isance tripping du e to transformer magnetizing inrush cu rren ts; avoid a wind in g temperature rise in excess of the permitted valu e for the insu lation class of transformer when it is su bj ected to the effects of a short-circu it at its secondary terminals. 7.2.8 Location of overcurrent protective devices An overcurren t protective device shal l be l ocated at the poin t where a reduction in the crosssectional area of the con ductors or another chan ge red uces the cu rren t-carrying capacity of the con ductors, except where all the fol lowin g cond itions are satisfied : – – – the curren t carrying capacity of the conductors is at least eq ual to that of the load; the part of the conductor(s) between the point of reduction of curren t-carrying capacity and the position of the overcurren t protective d evice is no longer than 3 m; the cond uctors are instal led in such a mann er as to reduce the possibil ity of a shortcircu it, for example, protected by an enclosure or d uct. 7.2.9 Overcurrent protective devices The rated short-circu it breakin g capacity shal l be at least equal to the prospective fau lt cu rren t at the poin t of instal lation . Where the short-circu it cu rren t to an overcurren t protective device can inclu de add itional curren ts other than from the suppl y (for example from motors, from power factor correction capacitors), those curren ts shall be taken in to consideration. N OTE I n formati on on co-ord i n ati on u nd er sh ort-ci rcu i t con d i ti on s between a ci rcu i t-breaker an d anoth er sh ortci rcu i t protecti ve d evi ce i s provi d ed i n An n ex A of I EC 60947-2: 2006, I EC 60947-2: 2006/AM D1 : 2009 and I EC 60947-2: 2006/AM D2: 201 3. Where fuses are provided as overcu rren t protective d evices, a type readil y available in the coun try of use shall be selected, or arrangements shal l be made for the suppl y of spare parts. 7.2.1 0 Rating and setting of overcurrent protective devices The rated cu rren t of fuses or the setting curren t of other overcurren t protective d evices shal l be selected as low as possibl e bu t adequate for the an ticipated overcurren ts (for example d uring starting of motors or energizing of transformers). When selecting those protective http://www.china-gauges.com/ d evices, consid eration shal l be given to the protection of switching devices against damage d ue to overcu rren ts. The rated cu rren t or setting of an overcurrent protective device for cond uctors is determined by the curren t carryin g capacity of the conductors to be protected in accordance with 1 2. 4, Clause D. 3 and the maximum al lowabl e in terruptin g time t in accordance with Clause D. 4, takin g in to accoun t the n eeds of co-ord in ation with other electrical devices in the protected circu it. 7.3 7.3.1 Protection of motors against overheating General Protection of motors against overheating shal l be provid ed for each motor rated at more than 0, 5 kW. Exception: I n applications where an automatic in terruption of the motor operation is unacceptable (for example fire pu mps), the means of d etection shal l give a warning sign al to which the operator can respon d. BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 – 43 – Protection of motors against overheating can be achieved by: – overload protection (7. 3. 2), N OTE 1 Overload protecti ve d evi ces d etect th e ti m e an d cu rren t rel ati onshi ps ( I 2 t ) i n a ci rcu i t th at are i n excess of th e rated fu l l l oad of th e ci rcu i t an d i ni ti ate appropri ate con trol respon ses. – over-temperature protection (7. 3. 3), or N OTE 2 Tem peratu re d etecti on d evi ces sense over-tem peratu re and i ni ti ate appropri ate con trol respon ses. – cu rrent-l imitin g protection . Au tomatic restarting of an y motor after the operation of protection against overheating shall be preven ted where this can cause a hazard ous situation or d amage to the machin e or to the work in progress. 7.3.2 Overload protection Where overload protection is provided , d etection of overload (s) shall be provided in each l ive conductor except for the n eutral conductor. H owever, where the motor overl oad d etection is n ot used for cable overload protection (see also Clause D. 2), d etection of overload may be omitted in one of the live conductors. For motors having single-phase or DC power supplies, detection in on l y one unearthed live conductor is permitted . Where overload protection is achieved by switchin g off, the switching device shall switch off all live cond uctors. The switchin g of the neutral conductor is n ot necessary for overload protection . Where motors with special duty ratings are required to start or to brake frequen tl y (for example, motors for rapid traverse, lockin g, rapid reversal, sensitive dril ling) it can be d ifficu lt to provid e overload protection with a time constan t comparable with that of the wind in g to be protected. Appropriate protective devices design ed to accommodate special duty motors or over-temperature protection (see 7. 3. 3) can be necessary. For motors that cannot be overloaded (for example torqu e motors, motion drives that either are protected by mechan ical overload protection devices or are adequately d imension ed), overload protection is not requ ired . 7.3.3 Over-temperature protection http://www.china-gauges.com/ The provision of motors with over-temperature protection in accord ance with I EC 60034-1 1 is recommended in situations where the cool ing can be impaired (for example dusty en viron men ts). Depend in g u pon the type of motor, protection u nder stal led rotor or l oss of phase conditions is not always ensured by over-temperature protection , and additional protection shou ld then be provided . Over-temperature protection is also recommended for motors that cannot be overload ed (for example torq ue motors, motion drives that are either protected by mechan ical overload protection devices or are adequ ately d imensioned), where the possibil ity of over-temperature exists (for example due to red uced cool in g). 7.4 Protection against abnormal temperature Eq uipmen t shal l be protected against abnormal temperatures that can resu l t in a hazard ous situation . BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 44 – 7.5 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 Protection against the effects of supply interruption or voltage reduction and subsequent restoration Where a supply in terru ption or a voltage reduction can cause a hazardous situ ation , d amage to the machin e, or to the work in progress, un dervoltage protection shal l be provided by, for example, switching off the machine at a predetermined vol tage level. Where the operation of the machine can all ow for an in terruption or a reduction of the vol tage for a short time period , d elayed un dervol tage protection may be provided . The operation of the un dervoltage d evice shall n ot impair the operation of an y stopping control of the machin e. U pon restoration of the vol tage or u pon switching on the incomin g su ppl y, au tomatic or u nexpected restarting of the machine shall be preven ted where such a restart can cause a hazardous situation . Where on ly a part of the machin e or of the group of machin es workin g together in a coord inated manner is affected by the vol tage reduction or supply in terruption , the undervol tage protection shall initiate appropriate con trol comman ds to ensu re co-ord in ation . 7.6 Motor overspeed protection Overspeed protection shall be provided where overspeed ing can occur and cou ld possibl y cause a hazard ous situ ation takin g in to accoun t measures in accordance with 9. 3. 2. Overspeed protection shall initiate appropriate con trol responses an d shall preven t au tomatic restarting. The overspeed protection shou ld operate in such a mann er that the mechan ical speed l imit of the motor or its load is not exceeded. N OTE Th i s protecti on can con si st, for exampl e, of a cen tri fu g al swi tch or speed l i m i t m on i tor. 7.7 Additional earth fault/residual current protection I n addition to provid ing overcurren t protection for au tomatic d isconnection as described in 6. 3, earth fau l t/resid ual curren t protection can be provided to red uce d amage to eq uipmen t du e to earth fau lt cu rren ts less than the detection l evel of the overcu rrent protection . The settin g of the devices shall be as low as possible consisten t with correct operation of the equipmen t. http://www.china-gauges.com/ I f fault curren ts with DC components are possible, an RCD of type B in accordance with I EC TR 60755 can be req uired . 7.8 Phase sequence protection Where an incorrect phase sequence of the su pply voltage can cause a hazard ous situ ation or d amage to the machine, protection shall be provided . N OTE Con d i ti on s of u se th at can l ead to an i n correct ph ase seq u en ce i n cl u d e: 7.9 - a m achi n e transferred from one su ppl y to an oth er; - a m obi l e m achi n e wi th a faci l i ty for con n ecti on to an external power su ppl y. Protection against overvoltages due to lightning and to switching surges Surge protective devices (SPDs) can be provided to protect against the effects of overvoltages d ue to lightn ing or to switching surges. Where provid ed : BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 – – – 45 – SPDs for the su ppression of overvol tages du e to l ightn ing shall be connected to the incoming terminals of the supply d isconnecting d evice. SPDs for the su ppression of overvol tages du e to switching surges shall be con nected as n ecessary for eq uipment requiring such protection . N OTE 1 I n form ati on abou t th e correct sel ecti on an d i nstal l ati on of SPDs i s gi ven for exam pl e i n I EC 60364-4-44, I EC 60364-5-53, I EC 61 643-1 2, I EC 62305-1 an d I EC 62305-4. N OTE 2 Eq u i poten ti al bon d i n g of th e m ach i n e, i ts el ectri cal eq u i pmen t an d extran eou s-con d u cti ve-parts to a com mon bon d i n g n etwork of th e bu i l d i n g /si te can h el p m i ti gate el ectrom ag n eti c i n terference, i n cl u d i n g the effects of l i g h tni n g , on th e eq u i pm en t. 7.1 0 Short-circuit current rating The short-circuit curren t ratin g of the el ectrical equ ipment shal l be determined . This can be d one by the application of d esign rul es or by calcul ation or by test. N OTE Th e sh ort-ci rcu i t cu rren t rati n g m ay be d etermi n ed , for exampl e, i n accordan ce wi th I EC 61 439-1 , I EC 60909-0, I EC/TR 60909-1 , or I EC/TR 61 91 2-1 . 8 8.1 Equipotential bonding General This Clause 8 provides requ irements for protective bond ing and functional bonding. Figure 4 il lustrates those concepts. Protective bond ing is a basic provision for fault protection to enable protection of persons against electric shock (see 6. 3. 3 and 8. 2). The objective of functional bond in g (see 8. 4) is to red uce: – – – the consequence of an insulation failure which cou ld affect the operation of the machin e; electrical disturbances to sensitive electrical equ ipmen t which cou ld affect the operation of the machine; induced curren ts from lightning which could damage the el ectric eq uipment. Functional bond ing is achieved by connection to the protective bond in g circu it, bu t where the l evel of electrical d isturbances on the protective bon ding circu it is not su fficien tl y l ow for proper functioning of electrical eq uipmen t, it can be necessary to use separate con ductors for protective an d functional bonding. http://www.china-gauges.com/ BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 46 – I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 M achi n e El ectri cal eq u i pm en t IEC Protecti ve bon di n g ci rcui t: (1 ) I n tercon n ecti on of protecti ve con d u ctor(s) and th e PE termi n al (2) Con n ecti on of exposed con d u cti ve parts (3) Protecti ve con d u ctor con n ected to an el ectri cal eq u i pm ent mou n ti n g pl ate u sed as a protecti ve con d u ctor (4) Con n ecti on of con d u cti ve structu ral parts of th e el ectri cal eq u i pmen t (5) Con d u cti ve stru ctu ral parts of th e m ach i n e Parts con nected to the protecti ve bondi n g ci rcu i t whi ch are n ot to be u sed as protecti ve con du ctor: (6) M etal d u cts of fl exi bl e or ri gi d constructi on (7) M etal l i c cabl e sh eaths or armou ri n g (8) M etal l i c pi pes con tai n i n g fl ammabl e m ateri al s (9) Extran eou s-con d u cti ve-parts, i f earth ed i n d epen d en tl y from th e power su ppl y of th e m ach i n e an d l i abl e to i n trod u ce a poten ti al , gen eral l y th e earth poten ti al , (see 1 7. 2 d )), e. g . : m etal l i c pi pes, fen ces, l ad d ers, h an d rai l s. (1 0) Fl exi bl e or pl i abl e m etal cond u i ts (1 1 ) Protecti ve bond i n g of su pport wi res, cabl es tray an d cabl e l ad d ers (1 2) Fu n cti on al bond i n g T1 Au xi l i ary tran sformer U1 M ou n ti n g pl ate of el ectri cal eq u i pmen t http://www.china-gauges.com/ Conn ecti on s to the protecti ve bondi ng ci rcu i t for fu n cti onal reasons: Leg en d to referen ce desi g n ati on s: Figu re 4 – Example of equ ipotential bonding for electrical equ ipment of a machine BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 8.2 – 47 – Protective bonding circuit 8.2.1 General The protective bonding circuit consists of the in terconnection of: • PE terminal(s) (see 5. 2); • the protective cond uctors (see 3. 1 . 51 ) in the equ ipmen t of the machine includin g slid ing con tacts where they are part of the circuit; • the con ductive structural parts an d exposed conductive parts of the electrical equ ipmen t; Exception: see 8. 2. 5. • conductive structural parts of the machine. All parts of the protective bond in g circu it shall be so design ed that they are capable of withstanding the highest thermal and mechanical stresses that can be caused by earth-faul t cu rren ts that could flow in that part of the protective bon ding circu it. The cross-sectional area of every protective con ductor which does n ot form part of a cable or which is n ot in a common enclosu re with the line conductor shall be not less than – 2, 5 mm 2 Cu or 1 6 mm 2 Al if protection against mechanical d amage is provided, – 4 mm 2 Cu or 1 6 mm 2 Al if protection against mechan ical damage is not provid ed . N OTE Th e u se of steel for a protecti ve con d u ctor i s n ot excl u d ed . A protective cond uctor not forming part of a cable is considered to be mechan ical ly protected if it is instal led in a condu it, tru nking or protected in a similar way. Cond uctive structural parts of equipment in accordance with 6. 3. 2. 2 need n ot be connected to the protective bond in g circu it. Conductive structural parts of the machine need not be conn ected to the protective bond in g circu it where all the eq uipmen t provided is in accordance with 6. 3. 2. 2. Exposed con ductive parts of equ ipmen t in accord ance with 6. 3. 2. 3 shal l n ot be conn ected to the protective bonding circuit. I t is not n ecessary to connect exposed conductive parts to the protective bond ing circuit where those parts are moun ted so that they d o not constitute a hazard because: – – they cannot be touched on l arge surfaces or grasped with the han d an d they are smal l in size (less than approximatel y 50 mm × 50 mm); or http://www.china-gauges.com/ they are l ocated so that either con tact with live parts, or an insu lation fail ure, is u n likely. This appl ies to small parts such as screws, rivets, and nameplates an d to parts inside an encl osure, irrespective of their size (for example electromagn ets of contactors or relays an d mechan ical parts of d evices). 8.2.2 Protective conductors Protective conductors shal l be iden tified in accordance with 1 3. 2. 2. Copper cond uctors are preferred. Where a conductor material other than copper is used , its electrical resistance per u nit length shal l n ot exceed that of the al lowabl e copper conductor and such conductors shal l be n ot l ess than 1 6 mm 2 in cross-section al area for reasons of mechan ical d urabil ity. M etal enclosu res or frames or mou n ting plates of electrical equ ipmen t, conn ected to the protective bonding circuit, may be used as protective conductors if they satisfy the following three requiremen ts: BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 48 – I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 • their electrical con tin uity shal l be assured by construction or by suitable connection so as to ensure protection against mechan ical, chemical or electrochemical deterioration ; • they compl y with the requ iremen ts of 543. 1 of I EC 60364-5-54: 201 1 ; • they shall permit the con nection of other protective conductors at every predetermin ed tap-off poin t. The cross-sectional area of protective con ductors shal l either be calcu lated in accordance with 543. 1 . 2 of I EC 60364-5-54: 201 1 , or selected in accordance with Tabl e 1 (see 5. 2). See also 8. 2. 6. an d 1 7. 2 (d) of this documen t. Each protective conductor shall : • be part of a mul ticore cable, or; • be in a common enclosure with the l in e con ductor, or; • have a cross-sectional area of at least; • 2, 5 mm 2 Cu or 1 6 mm 2 Al if protection against mechan ical d amage is provided ; • 4 mm 2 Cu or 1 6 mm 2 Al if protection against mechan ical damage is not provid ed. N OTE 1 Th e u se of steel for a protecti ve con d u ctor i s n ot excl u d ed . A protective cond uctor not forming part of a cable is considered to be mechan ical ly protected if it is installed in a condu it, tru nking or protected in a similar way. The fol lowing parts of the machine and its electrical equ ipmen t shall be connected to the protective bonding circuit bu t shall not be used as protective conductors: • conductive structural parts of the machin e; • metal ducts of flexible or rigid construction ; • metallic cable sheaths or armouring; • metallic pipes con tain ing fl ammabl e materials such as gases, l iqu ids, powder. • flexible or pliable metal condu its; • constructional parts su bject to mechanical stress in n ormal service; • flexible metal parts; support wires; cable trays and cable lad ders. N OTE 2 I n formati on on cathod i c protecti on i s provi d ed i n 542. 2. 5 an d 542. 2. 6 of I EC 60364-5-54: 201 1 . 8.2.3 Continuity of the protective bonding circuit http://www.china-gauges.com/ Where a part is removed for any reason (for example routin e main tenance), the protective bond in g circu it for the remain ing parts shal l n ot be interru pted. Connection and bond ing poin ts shal l be so designed that their curren t-carryin g capacity is not impaired by mechan ical, chemical, or electrochemical influ ences. Where enclosures and conductors of aluminium or aluminiu m al loys are used , particul ar consid eration shou ld be given to the possibil ity of electrol ytic corrosion . Where the electrical equ ipmen t is mou n ted on l ids, doors, or cover plates, con tinu ity of the protective bond ing circu it shal l be ensured an d a protective con ductor (see 8. 2. 2) is recommended . Where a protective conductor is not provided , fasten ings, hin ges or sl id ing contacts design ed to have a l ow resistance shall be used (see 1 8. 2. 2, Test 1 ). The con tinuity of conductors in cabl es that are exposed to d amage (for example fl exible trail ing cables) shall be ensured by appropriate measures (for example monitoring). BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 – 49 – For requ irements for the con tinu ity of cond uctors usin g cond uctor wires, conductor bars and slip-ring assemblies, see 1 2. 7. 2. The protective bon ding circu it shall n ot incorporate a switching device, an overcurren t protective device (for example switch, fuse), or other means of in terru ption . Exception: links that cann ot be opened withou t the use of a tool and that are located in an encl osed el ectrical operating area may be provided for test or measuremen t purposes. Where the con tinu ity of the protective bond in g circuit can be in terrupted by means of removable cu rrent col lectors or plug/socket combinations, the protective bond ing circuit shall be interrupted by a first make last break con tact. This also appl ies to removabl e or withd rawable pl ug-in un its (see also 1 3. 4. 5). 8.2.4 Protective conductor connecting points Al l protective conductors shall be terminated in accord ance with 1 3. 1 . 1 . The protective conductor connecting poin ts are not in tended , for example, to attach appl iances or parts. Each protective cond uctor connecting poin t shall be marked or label led as such using the symbol I EC 6041 7-501 9: 2006-08 as ill ustrated in Figure 5: Figure 5 – Symbol IEC 6041 7-501 9: Protective earth or with the letters PE, the graphical symbol being preferred , or by use of the bicolour combin ation GREEN -AN D-YELLOW, or by any combin ation of these. 8.2.5 Mobile machines On mobile machin es with on-board power supplies, the protective conductors, the conductive structural parts of the el ectrical equ ipment, an d those extran eous-conductive-parts which form the structure of the machine shall all be connected to a protective bon ding terminal to provide protection against electric shock. Where a mobile machin e is also capable of being connected http://www.china-gauges.com/ to an external incoming power supply, this protective bond ing terminal shal l be the connection poin t for the extern al protective conductor. N OTE Wh en th e su ppl y of el ectri cal energ y i s sel f-con tai n ed wi th i n stati on ary, m obi l e, or m ovabl e i tems of eq u i pm en t, an d when th ere i s n o extern al su ppl y con n ected (for exam pl e when an on -board battery ch arg er i s not con n ected ), th ere i s n o n eed to con n ect su ch eq u i pm ent to an extern al protecti ve con d u ctor. 8.2.6 Additional requirements for electrical equipment having earth leakage currents higher than 1 0 mA Where electrical eq uipmen t has an earth leakage curren t that is greater than 1 0 mA AC or DC in any protective conductor, one or more of the fol lowing con ditions for the in tegrity of each section of the associated protective bond ing circuit that carries the earth leakage cu rren t shall be satisfied : a) the protective cond uctor is compl etely encl osed within electrical equ ipmen t encl osures or otherwise protected throu ghou t its len gth against mechan ical d amage; b) the protective cond uctor has a cross-sectional area of at least 1 0 mm 2 Cu or 1 6 mm 2 Al ; c) where the protective con ductor has a cross-section al area of less than 1 0 mm 2 Cu or 1 6 mm 2 Al, a second protective cond uctor of at least the same cross-sectional area is BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 50 – I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 provided up to a poin t where the protective conductor has a cross-sectional area not less than 1 0 mm 2 Cu or 1 6 mm 2 Al. This can req uire that the el ectrical eq uipmen t has a separate terminal for a second protective conductor. d ) the supply is au tomatical ly d isconnected in case of l oss of con tinu ity of the protective conductor; e) where a plug-socket combination is u sed , an ind ustrial con nector in accord ance with I EC 60309 series, with ad equ ate strain relief and a min imum protective earthing conductor cross-section of 2, 5 mm 2 as part of a mu lti-con ductor power cable is provided . A statemen t shall be given in the instructions for installation that the equ ipment shall be instal led as described in this 8. 2. 6. N OTE A warn i n g l abel m ay al so be provi d ed ad j acen t to th e PE termi nal to state th at th e protecti ve con d u ctor cu rren t exceed s 1 0m A. 8.3 Measures to restrict the effects of high leakage current The effects of high l eakage curren t can be restricted to the equ ipmen t having high leakage curren t by connection of that eq uipmen t to a dedicated suppl y transformer having separate wind in gs. The protective bon ding circu it shal l be conn ected to exposed conductive parts of the eq uipmen t and , in ad dition, to the second ary wind ing of the transformer. The protective conductor(s) between the equ ipment an d the second ary wind in g of the transformer shall comply with one or more of the arrangements d escribed in 8. 2. 6. 8.4 Functional bonding Protection against maloperation as a resu l t of insu lation failures can be achieved by connectin g to a common conductor in accordance with 9. 4. 3. 1 . 1 . For recommen dations regard ing fu nctional bon ding electromagnetic d istu rbances, see 4. 4. 2 an d Annex H . to avoid maloperation du e to Functional bond ing con necting points shou ld be marked or label led as such using the symbol I EC 6041 7-5020: 2002-1 0 (see Figure 6). http://www.china-gauges.com/ Figure 6 – Symbol IEC 6041 7-5020: Frame or chassis 9 Control circuits and control functions 9.1 Control circuits 9.1 .1 Control circuit supply Where con trol circu its are suppl ied from an AC source, transformers havin g separate wind in gs shall be used to separate the power su ppl y from the con trol supply. Examples includ e: • con trol transformers havin g separate wind in gs in accord ance with I EC 61 558-2-2, • switch mode power su ppl y un its in accordance with I EC 61 558-2-1 6 fitted with transformers having separate win dings, BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 • – 51 – low vol tage power suppl ies in accordance with I EC 61 204-7 fitted with transformers having separate windings. Where several transformers are used, it is recommend ed that the wind ings of those transformers be con nected in such a man ner that the secondary voltages are in phase. Exception : Transformers or switch mod e power suppl y u n its fitted with transformers are not man datory for machines with a single motor starter and /or a maximu m of two con trol d evices (for example, in terl ock device, start/stop con trol station). Where DC con trol circuits derived from an AC suppl y are conn ected to the protective bondin g circu it (see 8. 2. 1 ), they shal l be suppl ied from a separate windin g of the AC con trol circuit transformer or by another control circuit transformer. 9.1 .2 Control circuit voltages The nominal valu e of the con trol voltage shal l be consisten t with the correct operation of the con trol circuit. The nomin al vol tage of AC con trol circu its shou ld preferably not exceed – – 230 V for circuits with 50 H z n omin al frequ ency, 277 V for circuits with 60 H z n omin al frequ ency. The nomin al vol tage of DC con trol circu its shou ld preferably not exceed 220 V. 9.1 .3 Protection Con trol circu its shall be provided with overcu rrent protection in accordance with 7. 2. 4 and 7. 2. 1 0. 9.2 Control functions 9.2.1 General N OTE Su bcl au se 9. 2 d oes n ot speci fy req u i rem en ts for th e d evi ces u sed to i mpl emen t con trol fun cti on s. Exam pl es of req u i remen ts for d evi ces are gi ven i n Cl au se 1 0. 9.2.2 Categories of stop functions There are three categories of stop functions as foll ows: – stop category 0: – stop category 1 : – stop category 2: http://www.china-gauges.com/ stopping by immed iate removal of power to the machin e actu ators (i. e. an uncon troll ed stop – see 3. 1 . 64); a con troll ed stop (see 3. 1 . 1 4) with power avail able to the machine actuators to achieve the stop and then removal of power when the stop is achieved ; a con troll ed stop with power remaining available to the machin e actuators. N OTE For rem oval of power i t can be su ffi ci en t to rem ove th e power n eed ed to g en erate a torq u e or force. Thi s can be achi eved by d ecl u tchi ng , d i scon n ecti n g , swi tch i n g off, or by el ectron i c m eans (e. g . a PDS i n accord an ce wi th I EC 61 800 seri es), etc. 9.2.3 Operation 9.2.3.1 General Safety functions and/or protective measures (for example in terlocks (see 9. 3)) shall be provided where requ ired to reduce the possibil ity of hazardous situations. BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 52 – I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 Where a machin e has more than one con trol station, measu res shall be provid ed to ensure that initiation of comman ds from d ifferent con trol stations do n ot lead to a hazardous situation . 9.2.3.2 Start Start functions shall operate by energizing the rel evan t circuit. The start of an operation shall be possible onl y when all relevant safety functions and /or protective measures are in place and are operation al, except for con ditions as described in 9. 3. 6. For those machines (for example mobile machin es) where safety functions an d /or protective measures cannot be applied for certain operations, startin g of such operations shall be by hold-to-run con trols, together with enabl in g devices, as appropriate. The provision of acoustic and/or visual warning signals before the starting of hazardous machine operation shall be considered during the risk assessment. Where the risk assessment determines that either or both are required the emission level of noise/light shall be suitable for the intended environment. Su itabl e interlocks shall be provided where necessary for correct sequ en tial starting. I n the case of machin es requiring the use of more than one con trol station to initiate a start, each of these control stations shal l have a separate man ual l y actu ated start con trol d evice. The cond itions to initiate a start shal l be: • all required cond itions for machin e operation shall be met, and • all start control devices shal l be in the released (off) position , then • all start con trol devices shall be actuated concurren tl y (see 3. 1 . 7). 9.2.3.3 Stop Stop category 0 an d /or stop category 1 and /or stop category 2 stop functions shal l be provided as ind icated by the risk assessmen t and the function al req uirements of the machin e (see 4. 1 ). N OTE 1 Th e su ppl y d i scon n ecti n g d evi ce (see 5. 3) when operated achi eves a stop category 0. Stop functions shall overrid e related start functions. Where more than one con trol station is provided , stop comman dshttp://www.china-gauges.com/ from an y control station shall be effective when required by the risk assessmen t of the machine. N OTE 2 Wh en stop fu ncti on s are i ni ti ated , i t can be n ecessary to d i scon ti n u e m ach i n e fu ncti on s oth er th an m oti on . 9.2.3.4 9.2.3.4.1 Emergency operations (emergency stop, emergency switching off) General Emergency stop and emergency switching off are complemen tary protective measu res that are n ot primary means of risk reduction for hazards (for exampl e trapping, en tan gl emen t, electric shock or burn) at a machine (see I SO 1 21 00). This part of I EC 60204 specifies the requ iremen ts for the emergency stop and the emergency switching off functions of the emergency operations listed in Annex E, both of which are in tended to be initiated by a single hu man action. Once active operation of an emergency stop (see 1 0. 7) or emergency switchin g off (see 1 0. 8) actuator has ceased followin g a stop or switchin g off comman d, the effect of this command shal l be sustain ed until it is reset. This reset shal l be possible on ly by a manu al action at the BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 – 53 – d evice where the command has been in itiated. The reset of the command shal l not restart the machin ery but onl y permit restarting. I t shal l not be possible to restart the machinery u ntil al l emergency stop commands have been reset. I t shal l n ot be possible to reenergize the machinery u n til all emergency switchin g off commands have been reset. 9.2.3.4.2 Emergency stop Requ irements for function al aspects of emergency stop eq uipmen t are given in I SO 1 3850. The emergency stop shal l function either as a stop category 0 or as a stop category 1 . The choice of the stop category of the emergency stop depends on the resu l ts of a risk assessment of the machin e. Exception: I n some cases, to avoid creating ad ditional risks, it can be n ecessary to perform a con trol led stop an d maintain the power to machine actuators even after stopping is achieved . The stopped con dition shall be monitored an d upon detection of failure of the stopped cond ition , power shal l be removed withou t creating a hazard ous situation . I n addition to the requiremen ts for stop given in 9. 2. 3. 3, the emergency stop fu nction has the fol lowing requ iremen ts: • it shal l override al l other fu nctions and operations in all modes; • it shall stop the hazard ous motion as q uickly as practicable withou t creating other hazards; • reset shal l not in itiate a restart. 9.2.3.4.3 Emergency switching off The fu nctional aspects of emergency switching off are given in 536. 4 of I EC 60364-5-53: 2001 . Emergency switching off shou ld be provided where: • basic protection (for example for conductor wires, conductor bars, slip-ring assemblies, con trolgear in el ectrical operating areas) is achieved on l y by pl acing out of reach or by obstacles (see 6. 2. 6); or • there is the possibil ity of other hazards or damage caused by electricity. Emergency switching off is accomplished by switching off the relevant su pply by electromechanical switchin g devices, effectin g a stop category http://www.china-gauges.com/ 0 of machine actu ators connected to this incoming suppl y. When a machin e cann ot tol erate this category 0 stop, it may be necessary to provid e other measures, for example basic protection , so that emergency switching off is not necessary. 9.2.3.5 Operating modes Each machin e can have one or more operating mod es (for exampl e man ual mode, automatic mod e, settin g mode, main tenance mode) determin ed by the type of machin e an d its application . Where machin ery has been designed and constructed to allow its use in several con trol or operating modes req u irin g different protective measures an d having a d ifferen t impact on safety, it shal l be fitted with a mod e selector which can be locked in each position (for example key operated switch). Each position of the selector shal l be clearl y iden tifiabl e an d shal l correspond to a sin gl e operating or con trol mod e. The selector may be replaced by another selection method which restricts the use of certain fu nctions of the machinery to certain categories of operator (for example access cod e). BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 54 – I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 M od e sel ection by itself shall not in itiate machine operation . A separate actuation of the start control shall be requ ired . For each specific operating mode, the relevan t safety functions an d/or protective measures shal l be implemen ted. I n dication of the sel ected operatin g mod e shall be provided (for example the position of a mod e selector, the provision of an ind icatin g l ight, a visu al display in dication). 9.2.3.6 Monitoring of command actions M ovemen t or action of a machin e or part of a machin e that can resu l t in a hazardous situation shal l be mon itored by providing, for example, overtravel limiters, motor overspeed detection , mechan ical overload detection or an ti-col lision devices. N OTE On som e m anu al l y con trol l ed m ach i n es (for exam pl e, m an u al d ri l l i ng m achi n e), operators provi d e m on i tori n g . 9.2.3.7 Hold-to-run controls H old -to-run controls shal l requ ire continuous actuation of the con trol d evice(s) to achieve operation . 9.2.3.8 Two-hand control Three types of two-hand con trol are d efined in I SO 1 3851 , the selection of which is determined by the risk assessment. These shal l have the followin g features: Type I : this type requ ires: • the provision of two control d evices and their concurrent actu ation by both han ds; • con tinuous concurren t actu ation d uring the hazardous situation; • machin e operation shall cease upon the rel ease of either one or both of the con trol d evices when hazardous situations are stil l present. A Type I two-hand con trol d evice is not considered to be suitable for the initiation of hazardous operation. Type I I : a Type I con trol req uiring the release of both con trol devices before machine operation can be reinitiated . http://www.china-gauges.com/ Type I I I : a Type I I con trol requ iring concurren t actu ation of the con trol devices as fol lows: • it shal l be n ecessary to actuate the con trol devices within a certain time limit of each other, n ot exceed ing 0, 5 s; • where this time l imit is exceeded , both con trol devices shall be released before machine operation can be in itiated . 9.2.3.9 Enabling control En abling control (see also 1 0. 9) is a man uall y activated con trol fu nction in terlock that: a) when activated allows a machine operation to be initiated by a separate start con trol , and b) when de-activated • initiates a stop function , and • preven ts initiation of machin e operation. BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 – 55 – En abling con trol shal l be so arranged as to minimize the possibil ity of defeating, for exampl e by requ iring the d e-activation of the enablin g con trol device before machine operation may be reinitiated . 9.2.3.1 0 Combined start and stop controls Push-buttons and similar con trol devices that, when operated , alternatel y initiate and stop motion shall onl y be provided for fu nctions which cannot resu lt in a hazardous situation. 9.2.4 9.2.4.1 Cableless control system (CCS) General requirements Su bclause 9. 2. 4 deals with the fu nctional req uiremen ts of con trol systems employing cabl el ess (for exampl e rad io, in fra-red) techn iques for transmittin g con trol signals an d data between operator con trol station(s) and other parts of the con trol system(s). N OTE 1 Referen ce to a m achi n e i n 9. 2. 4 i s i n ten d ed to be read as “m ach i ne or part(s) of a m achi n e”. Where a safety function of a CCS relies on data transmission the transmission reliability shall be considered. The CCS shal l have fu nction ality and a response time su itable for the application based on the risk assessmen t. N OTE 2 I EC 61 784-3 d escri bes com mu n i cati on fai l u res of com mu n i cati on n etworks an d req u i rem en ts for safetyrel ated d ata tran sm i ssi on. N OTE 3 Fu rther req u i remen ts for cabl el ess con trol system s are u n d er d evel opm en t by I EC TC 44 i n d raft I EC 62745 1 . 9.2.4.2 Monitoring the ability of a cableless control system to control a machine The ability of a cableless con trol system (CCS) to control a machine shal l be au tomatically mon itored , either continuously or at su itable in tervals. The status of this ability shall be clearly indicated (for exampl e, by an ind icatin g l ight, a visu al displ ay indication , etc. ) I f the commu nication signal is degraded in a manner that might lead to the loss of the ability of a CCS to control a machine (e. g. , reduced signal level, l ow battery power) a warn ing to the operator shall be provided before the abil ity of the CCS to control a machin e is lost. When the ability of a CCS to con trol a machine has been l ost for http://www.china-gauges.com/ a time that is determin ed from a risk assessmen t of the application , an au tomatic stop of the machine shall be in itiated . N OTE I n some cases, for exam pl e, i n order to avoi d th i s au tom ati c stop g en erati n g an u n expected h azard ou s con d i ti on, i t can be necessary for the m achi ne to g o to a pred etermi n ed state before stoppi n g . Restoration of the ability of a CCS to con trol a machine shall n ot restart the machin e. Restart shal l requ ire a deliberate action , for example manu al actuation of a start button . 9.2.4.3 Control limitation M easures shal l be taken (e. g. coded transmission) to preven t the machin e from respond ing to sign als other than those from the in ten ded cableless operator con trol station(s). Cabl el ess operator con trol station(s) shal l onl y control the inten ded machin e(s) and shall affect on ly the in ten ded machin e functions. ___________ 1 U n d er consi d erati on . BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 56 – 9.2.4.4 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 Use of multiple cableless operator control stations When more than one cableless operator control station is used to con trol a machine, then : • onl y on e cableless operator con trol station shall be enabled at a time except as necessary for the operation of the machin e; • transfer of con trol from one cableless operator con trol station to another shall requ ire a d eliberate manual action at the con trol station that has con trol; • d uring machine operation , transfer of con trol shall on ly be possible when both cabl eless operator control stations are set to the same mode of machine operation and /or fu nction(s) of the machin e; • transfer of con trol shall not change the sel ected mod e of machine operation and /or fu nction(s) of the machine; • each cableless operator con trol station that has control of the machine shal l be provided with an ind ication that it has con trol (by for example, the provision of an in dicating l ight, a visual d isplay ind ication). N OTE I n d i cati on s at oth er l ocati on s can be necessary as d etermi n ed by th e ri sk assessm en t. 9.2.4.5 Portable cableless operator control stations Portable cableless operator con trol stations shal l be provided with means (for example key operated switch, access code) to preven t un authorized use. Each machin e und er cableless control shou ld have an indication when it is u nder cableless con trol . When a portabl e cableless operator con trol station can be conn ected to one or more of several machin es, means shall be provid ed on the portable cabl eless operator control station to select which machine(s) is to be connected . Selecting a machine to be connected shal l not in itiate con trol commands. 9.2.4.6 Deliberate disabling of cableless operator control stations Where a cableless operator con trol station is disabl ed when under con trol, the associated machin e shall meet the requirements for loss of abil ity of a CCS to con trol a machine in 9. 2. 4. 2. Where it is necessary to d isabl e a cableless operator con trol station withou t in terrupting machine operation , means shall be provided (for example on the http://www.china-gauges.com/ cableless operator con trol station) to transfer con trol to another fixed or portable control station . 9.2.4.7 Emergency stop devices on portable cableless operator control stations Emergency stop d evices on portable cableless operator con trol stations shal l not be the sole means of in itiating the emergency stop function of a machine. Con fusion between active an d inactive emergency stop devices shall be avoid ed by appropriate design and in formation for use. See also I SO 1 3850. 9.2.4.8 Emergency stop reset Restarting of cableless control after power loss, disabl ing and re-en abling, loss of commun ication , or failure of parts of the CCS shal l not resul t in a reset of an emergency stop cond ition . BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 – 57 – The instructions for use shall state that the reset of an emergency stop condition in itiated by a portable cableless operator con trol station shal l onl y be performed when it can be seen that the reason for initiation has been cleared . Where the risk assessment show that resetting of an emergency stop actuator on the portable cableless operator control station is not adequate then one or more supplementary fixed resets shall be provided. 9.3 9.3.1 Protective interlocks Reclosing or resetting of an interlocking safeguard The recl osing or resetting of an in terlockin g safeguard shal l n ot in itiate hazardous machin e operation . N OTE Req u i rem en ts for i n terl ocki n g gu ard s wi th a start fu n cti on (control g u ards) are speci fi ed i n 6. 3. 3. 2. 5 of I SO 1 21 00: 201 0. 9.3.2 Exceeding operating limits Where an operatin g l imit (for exampl e speed , pressure, position ) can be exceeded lead ing to a hazardous situation , means shal l be provided to detect when a pred etermined limit(s) is exceed ed an d initiate an appropriate con trol action . 9.3.3 Operation of auxiliary functions The correct operation of au xiliary fu nctions shal l be checked by appropriate devices (for exampl e pressure sensors). Where the n on-operation of a motor or device for an auxiliary fu nction (for example lubrication , su ppl y of coolan t, swarf removal ) can cause a hazardous situation , or cause damage to the machine or to the work in progress, appropriate in terlocking shall be provid ed . 9.3.4 Interlocks between different operations and for contrary motions All con tactors, relays, and other con trol d evices that con trol el emen ts of the machine and that can cause a hazardous situation when actuated at the same time (for example those which in itiate contrary motion), shall be interlocked against incorrect operation . Reversing contactors (for example those con troll ing the direction of rotation of a motor) shall be interlocked in such a way that in n ormal service no short-circu it can occu r when switching. http://www.china-gauges.com/ Where, for safety or for continuous operation , certain fu nctions on the machin e are req uired to be in terrelated , proper co-ord in ation shall be ensu red by su itabl e interlocks. For a group of machines working together in a co-ordinated manner and havin g more than one con troll er, provision shal l be made to co-ordinate the operations of the controllers as n ecessary. Where a failu re of a mechan ical brake actuator can resu lt in the brake bein g appl ied when the associated machin e actu ator is energized an d a hazardous situation can resul t, in terlocks shal l be provided to switch off the machine actuator. 9.3.5 Reverse current braking Where brakin g of a motor is accomplished by cu rren t reversal , measures shall be provided to preven t the motor starting in the opposite d irection at the en d of braking where that reversal can cause a hazard ous situation or d amage to the machine or to the work in progress. For this purpose, a device operatin g excl usivel y as a function of time is not permitted. BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 58 – I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 Con trol circu its shall be so arranged that rotation of a motor shaft, for exampl e by applying a man ual force or an y other force causin g the shaft to rotate after it has stopped, shal l n ot resu lt in a hazard ous situ ation . 9.3.6 Suspension of safety functions and/or protective measures Where it is necessary to suspen d safety functions and /or protective measu res (for example for setting or main ten ance purposes), the control or operatin g mode selector shall simultaneously: • d isabl e all other operating (con trol ) modes; • permit operation on l y by the use of a hol d-to-ru n device or by a similar con trol device positioned so as to permit sight of the hazardous elements; • permit operation of the hazardous el emen ts on ly in reduced risk cond itions (e. g. red uced speed , reduced power / force, step-by-step operation, e. g. with a l imited movemen t control device); • preven t an y operation of hazardous fu nctions by vol untary or in volun tary action on the machin e's sensors. I f these four con ditions can not be fu lfil led simu ltan eously, the con trol or operating mode selector shal l activate other protective measures d esigned and constructed to ensure a safe in tervention zone. I n ad dition , the operator shal l be abl e to con trol operation of the parts he is working on from the ad justmen t poin t. 9.4 Control functions in the event of failure 9.4.1 General requirements Where failu res or d istu rbances in the el ectrical eq uipmen t can cause a hazard ous situ ation or damage to the machine or to the work in progress, appropriate measures shall be taken to minimize the probability of the occu rrence of such failures or disturbances. The requ ired measures and the extent to which they are implemented , either individually or in combination, depend on the level of risk associated with the respective application (see 4. 1 ). Examples of such measures that can be appropriate inclu de bu t are not limited to: • protective interl ocking of the electrical circu it; • use of proven circuit techniques and components (see 9. 4. 2. 2); • provision of partial or complete redun dancy (see 9. 4. 2. 3) or diversity (see 9. 4. 2. 4); • provision for functional tests (see 9. 4. 2. 5). http://www.china-gauges.com/ The el ectrical control system(s) shal l have an appropriate performance that has been d etermined from the risk assessment of the machin e. The requ iremen ts for safety-related control functions of I EC 62061 an d /or I SO 1 3849-1 , I SO 1 3849-2 shal l apply. Where fu nctions performed by the electrical con trol system(s) have safety implications bu t application of I EC 62061 leads to a requ ired safety in tegrity less than that requ ired by SI L 1 , compl iance with the requ iremen ts of this part of I EC 60204 can lead to an adeq uate performance of the electrical con trol system(s). Where memory reten tion is achieved for example, by battery power, measu res shal l be taken to prevent hazard ous situ ations arising from fail ure, un dervoltage or removal of the battery. M eans shall be provided to prevent unau thorized or in adverten t memory al teration by, for example, req uiring the use of a key, access cod e or tool . BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 – 59 – 9.4.2 Measures to minimize risk in the event of failure 9.4.2.1 General M easures to minimize risk in the even t of fail ure inclu de bu t are not limited to: • use of proven circuit techniques and componen ts; • provisions of partial or complete redun dancy; • provision of d iversity; • provision for fu nctional tests. 9.4.2.2 Use of proven circuit techniques and components These measures includ e bu t are not limited to: • bond in g of control circu its to the protective bondin g circuit for functional purposes (see 9. 4. 3. 1 . 1 and Figure 4); • connection of con trol d evices in accordance with 9. 4. 3. 1 . 1 ; • stopping by d e-energizing; • the switching of al l control circuit conductors (for example both sid es of a coil) of the d evice bein g con trolled ; • switching devices having d irect open in g action (see I EC 60947-5-1 ); • mon itorin g by: – use of mechanical ly linked con tacts (see I EC 60947-5-1 ); – use of mirror con tacts (see I EC 60947-4-1 ); • circuit design to red uce the possibility of failures causing u ndesirable operations. 9.4.2.3 Provisions of partial or complete redundancy By provid ing partial or complete red un dancy, it is possible to minimize the probability that one single failure in the electrical circu it can resu l t in a hazardous situation . Red und ancy can be effective in n ormal operation (on-l ine red und ancy) or design ed as special circu its that take over the protective function (off-l ine redun dancy) onl y where the operatin g fu nction fails. Where off-line red un dancy which is n ot active d uring n ormal operation is provided , suitable measures shall be taken to ensure that those con trol circui ts are available when req uired . 9.4.2.4 Provision of diversity http://www.china-gauges.com/ The use of con trol circuits having d ifferen t principles of operation , or usin g d ifferen t types of componen ts or devices can red uce the probability of hazards resul ting from fau l ts and /or failures. Examples include: – – – the use of a combin ation of normally open and normall y closed con tacts; the use of d ifferen t types of con trol devices in the circu it(s); the combin ation of electromechan ical an d electron ic equipmen t configurations. in red und an t The combination of electrical an d non -electrical systems (for example mechan ical , hydrau l ic, pneu matic) may perform the red un dan t function an d provide the d iversity. 9.4.2.5 Provision for functional tests Functional tests may be carried ou t au tomaticall y by the con trol system, or man uall y by inspection or tests at start-up and at predetermined in tervals, or a combination as appropriate (see also 1 7. 2 and 1 8. 6). BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 60 – 9.4.3 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 Protection against malfunction of control circu its 9.4.3.1 Insu lation faults 9.4.3.1 .1 General M easures shall be provided to reduce the probabil ity that insul ation faults on any con trol circu it can cause mal function such as u nin tention al starting, poten tiall y hazardous motions, or preven t stoppin g of the machin e. The measures to meet the requ iremen ts include bu t are not limited to the fol lowing methods: – – – – method method method method 9.4.3.1 .2 a) b) c) d) Earthed control circu its fed by transformers; N on-earthed con trol circu its fed by transformers; Con trol circuits fed by transformer with an earthed cen tre-tap wind ing; Con trol circuits not fed by a transformer. Method a) – Earthed control circuits fed by transformers The common conductor shall be connected to the protective bondin g circu it at the point of su pply. All contacts, sol id state elemen ts, etc. , which are in tended to operate an electromagnetic or other d evice (for example, a rel ay, indicator light) are to be inserted between the switched conductor of the con trol circuit supply and on e terminal of the coil or device. The other terminal of the coil or d evice is connected d irectly to the common conductor of the con trol circu it supply without any switching elemen ts (see Figure 7). I > 1 1 3 3 2 2 http://www.china-gauges.com/ IEC 1 Swi tched con d u ctors 2 Com m on cond u ctors 3 Con trol swi tches Figu re 7 – Method a) Earthed control circu it fed by a transformer N OTE M eth od a) can be u sed al so for DC con trol ci rcu i ts. I n th i s case th e tran sformer sh own i n Fi g u re 7 i s su bsti tu ted by a DC power su ppl y u n i t. Exception : Con tacts of protective devices may be conn ected between the common conductor and the coils, provided that the connection is very short (for example in the same enclosu re) so that an earth fau lt is u nl ikely (for exampl e overload relays d irectl y fitted to con tactors). BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 9.4.3.1 .3 – 61 – Method b) – N on-earthed control circu its fed by transformers Control circuits fed from a con trol transformer that is not con nected to the protective bond ing circu it shall either: 1 ) have 2-pole con trol switches that operate on both conductors, see Figure 8; or 2) be provid ed with a d evice, for exampl e an insul ation monitoring device, that in terrupts the circuit au tomaticall y in the even t of an earth fault, see Figu re 9; or 3) where an interruption as per item 2 above wou ld increase the risk, for example when continued operation is requ ired d urin g the first fault to earth, it can be su fficien t to provide an insu lation mon itoring d evice (e. g. in accordance with I EC 61 557-8) that wil l initiate an acoustic an d optical signal at the machin e, see Figu re 1 0. Requiremen ts for the procedure to be performed by the machin e user in response to this alarm shall be described in the in formation for use. I> 1 3 2 1 3 2 IEC 1 Swi tched con d u ctors 2 Com m on cond u ctors 3 Con trol swi tches http://www.china-gauges.com/ Figure 8 – Method b1 ) N on-earthed control circuit fed by transformer N OTE 1 M ethod b1 ) can be u sed al so for DC con trol ci rcu i ts. I n thi s case th e transformer sh own i n Fi g u re 8 i s su bsti tu ted by a DC power su ppl y. BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 62 – I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 I > 1 1 3 R 3 2 2 IEC 1 Swi tched con d u ctors 2 Com m on cond u ctors 3 Con trol swi tches Figure 9 – Method b2) N on-earthed control circuit fed by transformer N OTE 2 M ethod b2) can be u sed al so for DC con trol ci rcu i ts. I n th i s case th e transformer sh own i n Fi g u re 9 i s su bsti tu ted by a DC power su ppl y. N OTE 3 Fi g u re 9 d oes n ot sh ow th e overcu rren t protecti ve d evices i n th e m easu rem en t ci rcu i ts for protecti on of th e i nsu l ati on m on i tori n g d evi ce. I > 1 1 3 3 http://www.china-gauges.com/ R 2 2 IEC 1 Swi tched con d u ctors 2 Com m on cond u ctors 3 Con trol swi tches Figure 1 0 – Method b3) N on-earthed control circu it fed by transformer N OTE 4 M ethod b3) can be u sed al so for DC con trol ci rcu i ts. I n thi s case th e transformer sh own i n Fi g u re 1 0 i s su bsti tu ted by a DC power su ppl y. Wh en a tran sformer an d recti fi er com bi nati on i s u sed , th e i nsu l ati on mon i tori ng d evi ce i s con n ected to th e protecti ve bon d i n g ci rcu i t i n th e DC part of the con trol ci rcu i t, so after th e recti fi er. BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 – 63 – N OTE 5 Fi g u re 1 0 d oes n ot sh ow th e overcu rren t protecti ve d evi ces i n the m easu rem en t ci rcu i ts for protecti on of th e i nsu l ati on m on i tori n g d evi ce. 9.4.3.1 .4 Method c) – Control circu its fed by transformer with an earthed centre-tap winding Control circu its fed from a con trol transformer with its cen tre-tap windin g connected to the protective bonding circu it shall have overcurren t protective devices that break both the conductors. The control switches shall be 2-pole types that operate on both cond uctors. I> 1 3 2 1 3 2 IEC 1 Swi tch ed con d u ctors 2 Com m on cond u ctors 3 Con trol swi tch es Figure 1 1 – Method c) Control circu its fed by transformer with an earthed centre-tap winding 9.4.3.1 .5 http://www.china-gauges.com/ Method d) – Control circu its not fed by a transformer Con trol circu its that are not fed by a control transformer or switch mode power suppl y units fitted with transformers having separate wind ings in accordance with I EC 61 558-2-1 6 are on l y al lowed for machin es with a maximum of one motor starter and /or maximum of two control d evices, in accordance with 9. 1 . 1 . Depen ding on the earthing of the suppl y system the possible cases are: 1 ) d irectl y connected to an earthed su ppl y system (TN - or TT-system) and: a) being powered between a l ine cond uctor an d the n eutral conductor, see Figure 1 2; or b) being powered between two l ine cond uctors, see Figure 1 3; or 2) d irectly connected to a supply system that is n ot earthed or is earthed throu gh a high imped ance (I T-system) an d : a) being powered between a line cond uctor an d the n eu tral conductor, see Figure 1 4; or b) being powered between two line conductors, see Figure 1 5. BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 64 – I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 M ethod d1 b) requires mu l ti-pole con trol switches that switch all live conductors in order to avoid an un in ten tion al start in case of an earth faul t in the con trol circuit. M ethod d 2) requ ires that a device shal l be provided that in terrupts the circu it au tomaticall y in the even t of an earth fault. L1 L2 I M > L3 N control switch IEC Figu re 1 2 – Method d1 a) Control circuit without transformer connected between a phase and the neutral of an earthed supply system N OTE 1 Fi g u re 1 2 sh ows the case where th e su ppl y system i s a TN system . Th e con trol ci rcu i t i s the sam e i n th e case of a TT system . N OTE 2 Fi g u re 1 2 d oes n ot sh ow an y protecti ve d evi ces for th e power ci rcu i t and con trol ci rcu i t, provi si ons for whi ch are stated i n 6. 3 an d 7. 2. L1 L2 I M > L3 control switch http://www.china-gauges.com/ IEC Figu re 1 3 – Method d1 b) Control circu it without transformer connected between two phases of an earthed su pply system N OTE 3 Fi g u re 1 3 sh ows th e case wh ere th e su ppl y system i s a TN system. Th e con trol ci rcu i t i s the sam e in case of a TT system . N OTE 4 Fi g u re 1 3 d oes n ot sh ow an y n ecessary protecti ve d evi ces for power ci rcu i t an d con trol ci rcu i t, provi si ons for wh i ch are stated i n 6. 3 an d 7. 2. BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 – 65 – L1 L2 I M > L3 N control switch R IEC Figure 1 4 – Method d2a) Control circu it withou t transformer connected between phase and neutral of a non-earthed supply system N OTE 5 Fi g u re 1 4 d oes n ot sh ow an y n ecessary protective d evi ces for th e power ci rcu i t and con trol ci rcu i t, provi si ons for whi ch are stated i n 6. 3 an d 7. 2. L1 L2 I M > L3 control switch R IEC http://www.china-gauges.com/ Figu re 1 5 – Method d2b) control circuit without transformer connected between two phases of a non-earthed su pply system N OTE 6 Fi g u re 1 5 d oes n ot sh ow an y n ecessary protecti ve d evi ces for power ci rcu i t an d con trol ci rcu i t, provi si ons for whi ch are stated i n 6. 3 an d 7. 2. 9.4.3.2 Voltage interruptions See also 7. 5. Where the con trol system uses a memory device(s), proper fu nction ing in the even t of power failure shal l be ensured (for example by using a n on-vol atile memory) to prevent an y l oss of memory that can resul t in a hazard ous situ ation . 9.4.3.3 Loss of circuit continu ity Where the loss of con tin uity of con trol circuits depending upon sliding con tacts can resul t in a hazardous situation , appropriate measures shall be taken (for example by du pl ication of the sliding con tacts). BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 66 – I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 1 0 Operator interface and machine-mounted control devices 1 0.1 General 1 0.1 .1 General requirements Control devices for operator in terface shal l, as far as is practicable, be selected , moun ted , and iden tified or coded in accordance with I EC 61 31 0 series. The possibility of in ad verten t operation shall be min imized by, for example, positioning of devices, su itable design , provision of add itional protective measures. Particu lar consideration shall be given to the sel ection, arran gement, programmin g and use of operator inpu t devices such as touchscreens, keypads an d keyboards for the con trol of hazard ous machine operations, and of sensors (for example position sensors) that can in itiate machine operation . Further in formation can be fou nd in I EC 60447. Ergonomic principles shall be taken in to accoun t in the l ocation of operator interface d evices. 1 0.1 .2 Location and mounting As far as is practicable, machine-mou n ted con trol devices shall be: • readil y accessible for service and main tenance; • mou n ted in such a mann er as to min imize the possibility of d amage from activities such as material hand ling. The actuators of han d-operated con trol d evices shall be selected an d instal led so that: • they are not less than 0, 6 m above the servicing level an d are within easy reach of the normal working position of the operator; • the operator is not placed in a hazard ous situation when operatin g them. The actuators of foot-operated con trol d evices shal l be selected and installed so that: • they are within easy reach of the normal working position of the operator; • the operator is not pl aced in a hazard ous situation when operating them. 1 0.1 .3 Protection The degree of protection (I P rating in accordance with I EC 60529) together with other http://www.china-gauges.com/ appropriate measures shall provide protection against: • the effects of l iq uids, vapours, or gases found in the physical en vironmen t or used on the machine; • the ingress of con taminants (for example swarf, dust, particulate matter). I n add ition , the operator in terface con trol devices shall have a min imu m d egree of protection against contact with l ive parts of I PXXD in accord ance with I EC 60529. 1 0.1 .4 Position sensors Position sensors (for example position switches, proximity switches) shal l be so arranged that they wil l not be damaged in the even t of overtravel . Position sensors in circuits with safety-related con trol fu nctions (for example, to main tain the safe cond ition of the machine or prevent hazardous situations arisin g at the machine) shal l have direct open ing action (see I EC 60947-5-1 ) or shal l provide similar rel iabil ity (see 9. 4. 2). BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 – 67 – 1 0.1 .5 Portable and pendant control stations Portable and pend an t operator con trol stations and their con trol d evices shal l be so selected and arran ged as to minimize the possibility of machine operations caused by inad verten t actuation, shocks and vibrations (for example if the operator con trol station is dropped or strikes an obstruction) (see also 4. 4. 8). 1 0.2 Actuators 1 0.2.1 Colours Actuators (see 3. 1 . 1 ) shal l be colour-coded as foll ows. The col ours for START/ON actuators should be WH I TE, GREY, BLACK or GREEN with a preference for WH I TE. RED shal l n ot be used. The col our RED shal l be used for emergency stop an d emergency switching off actuators (including su ppl y discon necting devices where it is foreseen that they are for use in an emergency). I f a background exists immed iately around the actu ator, then this background shal l be coloured YELLOW. The combination of a RED actuator with a YELLOW background shal l only be used for emergency operation d evices. The colou rs for STOP/OFF actuators shoul d be BLACK, GREY, or WH I TE with a preference for BLACK. GREEN shall not be used . RED is permitted , bu t it is recommended that RED is n ot used near an emergency operation device. WH I TE, GREY, or BLACK are the preferred colours for actu ators that al ternately act as START/ON and STOP/OFF actu ators. The colours RED, YELLOW, or GREEN shal l not be used . WH I TE, GREY, or BLACK are the preferred col ou rs for actu ators that cause operation while they are actu ated and cease the operation when they are released (for example hol d-to-ru n). The col ours RED, YELLOW, or GREEN shal l n ot be used . Reset actuators shall be BLU E, WH I TE, GREY, or BLACK. Where they also act as a STOP/OFF actuator, the colours WH I TE, GREY, or BLACK are preferred with the main preference being for BLACK. GREEN shall n ot be used . The col our YELLOW is reserved for use in abnormal cond itions, for example, in the even t of an abnormal cond ition of the process, or to in terru pt an au tomatic cycle. http://www.china-gauges.com/ Where the same col our WH I TE, GREY, or BLACK is used for various fu nctions (for exampl e WH I TE for START/ON and for STOP/OFF actu ators) a suppl emen tary means of coding (for example shape, position , symbol) shal l be used for the id en tification of actu ators. 1 0.2.2 Markings I n ad dition to the functional iden tification as described in 1 6. 3, recommended symbols to be placed n ear to or preferabl y d irectl y on certain actuators are given in Table 2 or 3. BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 68 – I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 Table 2 – Symbols for actuators (Power) Power ON OFF ON /OFF (pu sh on -pu sh off) ON (h ol d -to-ru n ) I EC 6041 7-5007 I EC 6041 7-5008 I EC 6041 7-501 0 I EC 6041 7-501 1 (2002-1 0) (2002-1 0) (2002-1 0) (2002-1 0) Table 3 – Symbols for actuators (Machine operation) Machine operation 1 0.3 1 0.3.1 START STOP H OLD-TO-RU N EM ERGEN CY STOP I EC 6041 7-51 04 I EC 6041 7-51 1 0A I EC 6041 7-501 1 I EC 6041 7-5638 (2006-08) (2004-06) (2002-1 0) (2002-1 0) Indicator lights and displays General I ndicator lights and displays serve to give the fol lowin g types of in formation : – – ind ication : to attract the operator's atten tion or to ind icate that a certain task shou ld be performed. The colours RED, YELLOW, BLU E, an d GREEN http://www.china-gauges.com/ are normall y used in this mode; for flashin g ind icator l ights an d d isplays, see 1 0. 3. 3. con firmation: to con firm a command , or a cond ition , or to con firm the termination of a change or transition period. The colours BLU E an d WH I TE are n ormal l y used in this mod e and GREEN may be used in some cases. I ndicator l ights and displays shal l be selected and instal led in such a man ner as to be visible from the normal position of the operator (see also I EC 61 31 0-1 ). Circuits used for visual or au dibl e devices used to warn persons of an impending hazard ous even t shall be fitted with facilities to check the operability of these d evices. 1 0.3.2 Colours I ndicator lights shou ld be colour-coded with respect to the condition (status) of the machine in accord ance with Table 4. BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 – 69 – Table 4 – Colours for indicator lights and their meanings with respect to the condition of the machine Colour Meani ng Explanation Acti on by operator RED Em erg ency H azard ou s cond i ti on I m m ed i ate acti on to d eal wi th h azardou s con d i ti on (for exam pl e swi tchi n g off th e m achi n e su ppl y, bei n g al ert to th e h azard ou s con d i ti on an d stayi n g cl ear of th e m achi n e) YELLOW Abn ormal Abn ormal con d i ti on I m pen d i n g cri ti cal con d i ti on M on i tori n g an d /or i nterven ti on (for exam pl e by re-establ i shi n g th e i n ten d ed fun cti on ) BLU E M an d atory I n d i cati on of a con d i ti on th at req u i res acti on by th e operator M an d atory acti on GREEN N ormal N orm al con d i ti on Opti on al WH I TE N eu tral Oth er con d i ti ons; m ay be u sed wh en ever d ou bt exi sts abou t th e appl i cati on of RED, YELLOW, GREEN , BLU E M on i tori n g I n dicating towers on machin es shou ld have the applicable colours in the foll owing ord er from the top down; RED, YELLOW, BLU E, GREEN and WH I TE. 1 0.3.3 Flashing lights and displays For further distinction or in formation and especially to give add ition al emphasis, fl ashing lights and d isplays can be provided for the followin g purposes: – – – – to to to to attract attention ; request immediate action ; in dicate a d iscrepancy between the command and actual state; in dicate a change in process (flashin g du ring transition). I t is recommended that higher flashing freq uencies are used for higher priority in formation (see I EC 60073 for recommended flashing rates and pulse/pause ratios). Where flashing lights or d isplays are used to provide higher priority in formation , additional acoustic warn in gs shoul d be consid ered. 1 0.4 Illuminated push-buttons http://www.china-gauges.com/ I l lumin ated push-button actuators shal l be colou r-cod ed in accordance with 1 0. 2. 1 . Where there is d ifficul ty in assigning an appropriate colour, WH I TE shal l be used . The colour of active emergency stop actuators shall remain RED regard less of the state of the il lu mination . 1 0.5 Rotary control devices Devices having a rotational member, such as potentiometers an d selector switches, shal l have means of preven tion of rotation of the station ary member. Friction alon e shall not be considered su fficien t. 1 0.6 Start devices Actuators used to initiate a start function or the movemen t of machin e elemen ts (for example slides, spind les, carriers) shall be constructed and moun ted so as to minimize inad verten t operation. BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 70 – 1 0.7 1 0.7.1 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 Emergency stop devices Location of emergency stop devices Devices for emergency stop shall be read ily accessible. Emergency stop devices shall be provided at each location where the initiation of an emergency stop can be requ ired . There can be circumstances where con fusion can occur between active and inactive emergency stop d evices caused by, for example, un pluggin g or otherwise d isabling an operator con trol station . I n such cases, means (for example, d esign and in formation for use) shall be provided to minimise confusion . 1 0.7.2 Types of emergency stop device The types of d evice for emergency stop include, bu t are not l imited to: • a push-bu tton device for actuation by the palm or the fist (e. g. mushroom head type); • a pu ll-cord operated switch; • a ped al -operated switch withou t a mechan ical guard . The d evices shal l be in accordance with I EC 60947-5-5. 1 0.7.3 Operation of the supply disconnecting device to effect emergency stop Where a stop category 0 is su itable, the suppl y discon necting d evice may serve the function of emergency stop where: • it is readil y accessible to the operator; and • it is of the type described in 5. 3. 2 a), b), c), or d ). Where in tend ed for emergency use, the supply d isconnecting device shal l meet the colour requ iremen ts of 1 0. 2. 1 . 1 0.8 1 0.8.1 Emergency switching off devices Location of emergency switching off devices Emergency switching off devices shall be located as necessary http://www.china-gauges.com/ for the given application . N ormal ly, those devices will be located separate from operator control stations. Where con fusion can occur between emergency stop and emergency switching off devices, means shal l be provided to minimise con fusion . N OTE Th i s can be achi eved by, for exam pl e, th e provi si on of a break-gl ass encl osu re for th e em erg en cy swi tch i n g off d evi ce. 1 0.8.2 Types of emergency switching off device The types of device for initiation of emergency switching off include: • a push-bu tton operated switch with a pal m or mushroom head type of actuator; • a pu ll -cord operated switch. The d evices shall have d irect opening action (see Annex K of I EC 60947-5-1 : 2003 and I EC 60947-5-1 : 2003/AMD1 : 2009). BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 – 71 – 1 0.8.3 Local operation of the supply disconnecting device to effect emergency switching off Where the su pply disconn ecting device is to be locall y operated for emergency switchin g off, it shall be readily accessible and shall meet the colour requ iremen ts of 1 0. 2. 1 . 1 0.9 Enabling control device The enabl ing con trol function is d escribed in 9. 2. 3. 9. En abling con trol devices shall be selected and arran ged so as to minimize the possibility of d efeatin g. En abling control devices shal l be selected that have the following featu res: – – d esigned in accord ance with ergonomic principl es; for a two-position type: • position 1 : off-fu nction of the switch (actuator is not operated); position 2: enabling function (actuator is operated). for a three-position type: • – • position 1 : off-function of the switch (actuator is not operated); • position 2: en abling fu nction (actu ator is operated in its mid position ); • position 3: off-function (actu ator is operated past its mid position); • when return in g from position 3 to position 2, the en abling fu nction is n ot activated . N OTE I EC 60947-5-8 speci fi es req u i rem en ts for th ree-posi ti on en abl i n g swi tch es. 1 1 Controlgear: location, mounting, and enclosures 1 1 .1 General requirements Al l con trolgear shall be located and mou n ted so as to facil itate: – – – its accessibil ity and maintenance; its protection against the external in flu ences or con ditions u nder which it is in ten ded to operate; http://www.china-gauges.com/ operation and main tenance of the machine an d its associated equ ipmen t. 1 1 .2 Location and mounting 1 1 .2.1 Accessibility and maintenance All items of con trolgear shall be placed and oriented so that they can be iden tified withou t moving them or the wiring. For items that requ ire checking for correct operation or that are l iable to n eed replacement, those actions should be possible withou t d isman tlin g other equ ipmen t or parts of the machine (except opening d oors or removing covers, barriers or obstacles). Terminals not part of controlgear componen ts or devices shal l also con form to these requiremen ts. All con trolgear shall be mou nted so as to facilitate its operation and maintenance. Where a special tool is necessary to adj ust, main tain , or remove a d evice, such a tool shal l be su pplied . Where access is requ ired for regu lar maintenance or adjustmen t, the rel evant d evices shall be l ocated between 0, 4 m and 2, 0 m above the servicin g level . I t is recommended that termin als be at least 0, 2 m above the servicing level an d be so placed that conductors and cabl es can be easily connected to them. BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 72 – I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 N o devices except devices for operating, indicatin g, measuring, and cooling shall be mou n ted on doors or on access covers of encl osu res that are expected to be removed . Where con trol devices are con nected through plu g-in arran gemen ts, their association shall be mad e clear by type (shape), marking or reference designation , singl y or in combin ation (see 1 3. 4. 5). Pl ug-in devices that are hand led during normal operation shal l be provid ed with non in terchangeable features where the lack of such a facil ity can resu lt in mal functioning. Pl ug/socket combinations that are hand led during normal operation shal l be located and mou n ted so as to provide unobstructed access. Test points for connection of test equipmen t, where provid ed, shal l be: – – – – mou n ted so as to provide unobstructed access; clearl y id entified to correspond with the documentation; adeq uatel y insulated ; su fficien tl y spaced. 1 1 .2.2 Physical separation or grouping N on-electrical parts and devices, not d irectly associated with the electrical equipmen t, shall not be located within enclosures con taining controlgear. Devices such as sol enoid valves shou ld be separated from the other electrical equ ipment (for example in a separate compartment). Con trol devices mounted in the same l ocation an d connected to the power circu its, or to both power and con trol circuits, shoul d be grouped separately from those connected only to the con trol circuits. Terminals shall be separated in to groups for: – – – power circuits; con trol circuits of the machin e; other con trol circu its, fed from external sources (for example for interlockin g). The grou ps may be mou n ted ad jacen tl y, provided that each group can be read il y id en tified http://www.china-gauges.com/ (for example by markings, by use of d ifferen t sizes, by use of barriers or by col ours). When arrangin g the location of devices (inclu ding interconnections), the clearances and creepage d istances specified for them by the supplier shall be main tained, takin g into accoun t the external influences or cond itions of the physical en viron men t. 1 1 .2.3 Heating effects The temperature rise insid e electrical equ ipmen t enclosu res shall not exceed the ambien t temperatu re specified by the componen t manu facturers. N OTE 1 I EC TR 60890 can be u sed for th e cal cu l ati on of tem peratu re ri se i nsi d e en cl osu res. H eat generating componen ts (for example heat sinks, power resistors) shall be so located that the temperature of each componen t in the vicinity remains within the permitted limit. N OTE 2 I n formati on on th e sel ecti on of i n su l ati n g m ateri al s to resi st th ermal stresses i s g i ven i n I EC 6021 6 an d I EC 60085. BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 1 1 .3 – 73 – Degrees of protection The protection of con trolgear against ingress of solid foreign objects and of l iq uids shal l be adeq uate taking in to accoun t the external in fluences u nder which the machine is in tended to operate (i. e. the location and the physical en vironmen tal cond itions) an d shall be su fficien t against dust, cool an ts, lu bricants and swarf. N OTE 1 Th e d eg rees of protecti on agai n st i ng ress of water are covered by I EC 60529. Ad d i ti on al protecti ve m easu res can be n ecessary ag ai nst oth er l i q u i d s. Enclosures of con trolgear shall provide a degree of protection of at least I P22 (see I EC 60529). Exception : an enclosu re provid ing a minimu m degree of protection I P22 is n ot req uired where: a) an electrical operatin g area provides an appropriate degree of protection against ingress of sol ids and l iqu ids, or: b) removable collectors on cond uctor wire or con ductor bar systems are used and the measures of 1 2. 7. 1 are appl ied . N OTE 2 Some exam pl es of appl i cation s, al on g wi th th e d eg ree of protecti on typi cal l y provi d ed by th ei r en cl osu res, are l i sted bel ow: – ven ti l ated encl osu re, con tai n i n g onl y m otor starter resi stor an d other l arg e si ze eq u i pm en t I P1 0 – ven ti l ated encl osu re, con tai ni n g other eq u i pm en t I P32 – en cl osu re u sed i n g en eral i n d u stry I P32, I P43 an d I P54 – en cl osu re u sed i n l ocati on s that are cl ean ed wi th l ow-pressu re water j ets (hosi n g ) I P55 – en cl osu re provi d i n g protecti on ag ai nst fi n e d u st I P65 – en cl osu re contai ni n g sl i p-ri n g assem bl i es I P2X Depen d i n g u pon th e cond i ti on s where i n stal l ed , anoth er d eg ree of protecti on can be appropri ate. 1 1 .4 Enclosures, doors and openings Enclosures shall be constructed using materials capable of withstand ing the mechan ical , electrical and thermal stresses as wel l as the effects of humidity an d other environ mental factors that are likely to be encoun tered in n ormal service. Fasten ers used to secure doors an d covers shou ld be of the captivehttp://www.china-gauges.com/ type. Windows of enclosures shall be of a material suitable to withstand expected mechan ical stress and chemical attack. I t is recommended that enclosure doors having vertical hinges be not wider than 0, 9 m, with an an gle of open in g of at least 95°. The j oin ts or gaskets of doors, l ids, covers and enclosures shal l withstand the chemical effects of the aggressive liq uids, vapou rs, or gases used on the machine. The means provided to main tain the d egree of protection of an enclosure on doors, l ids and covers that require opening or removal for operation or mainten ance shall: • be secu rely attached to either the door/cover or the enclosure; • not deteriorate du e to removal or repl acemen t of the door or the cover, and so impair the degree of protection. Where openings in enclosures are provided (for exampl e, for cable access), incl ud in g those towards the floor or found ation or to other parts of the machin e, means shal l be provid ed to BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 74 – I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 ensure the d egree of protection specified for the equ ipmen t. Open ings for cabl e entries shall be easy to re-open on site. A suitable open in g may be provid ed in the base of enclosures within the machine so that moisture d ue to condensation can drain away. There shall be n o open ing between enclosu res con tainin g electrical equ ipmen t and compartments contain ing coolan t, lubricating or hydraul ic fluids, or those into which oil , other liqu ids, or d ust can penetrate. This req uiremen t does not appl y to electrical devices specifical l y designed to operate in oil (for example electromagnetic clu tches) n or to electrical equ ipmen t in which coolants are used . Where there are holes in an enclosure for moun tin g pu rposes, means may be necessary to ensure that after moun tin g, the holes d o not impair the requ ired protection . Eq uipmen t that, in n ormal or abnormal operation , can attain a surface temperature su fficien t to cause a risk of fire or detrimental effect to an enclosure material shall : – – – be l ocated within an enclosure that wil l withstand , without risk of fire or harmfu l effect, such temperatures as can be generated ; an d be mounted and l ocated at a su fficien t d istance from adj acen t equ ipmen t so as to allow safe d issipation of heat (see also 1 1 . 2. 3); or be otherwise screened by material that can withstand, withou t risk of fire or harmfu l effect, the heat emitted by the eq uipmen t. N OTE A warn i n g l abel i n accord an ce wi th 1 6. 2. 2 can be n ecessary. 1 1 .5 Access to electrical equipment Doors in gan gways and for access to electrical operating areas shal l : – – – be at least 0, 7 m wide an d 2, 0 m high; open ou twards; have a means (for example pan ic bolts) to allow open in g from the inside withou t the use of a key or tool. N OTE Fu rth er i n formati on is g i ven i n I EC 60364-7-729. 1 2 Conductors and cables 1 2.1 General requirements http://www.china-gauges.com/ Conductors and cables shall be selected so as to be su itable for the operating conditions (for exampl e voltage, cu rrent, protection against el ectric shock, grou ping of cabl es) and external in fluences (for example ambien t temperature, presence of water or corrosive substances, mechan ical stresses (incl udin g stresses durin g instal lation ), fire hazards) that can exist. These requ iremen ts do not appl y to the in tegral wiring of assemblies, su bassemblies, and d evices that are manu factured and tested in accordance with their relevan t I EC stand ard (for exampl e I EC 61 800 series). 1 2.2 Conductors Conductors shou ld be of copper. Where aluminium cond uctors are used, the cross-section al area shall be at l east 1 6 mm 2 . To ensure ad equ ate mechanical strength, the cross-sectional area of conductors shou ld not be less than as shown in Tabl e 5. H owever, cond uctors with small er cross-sectional areas or other constructions than shown in Table 5 may be used in equipment provided adequate mechan ical strength is achieved by other means and proper fu nction ing is n ot impaired. BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 – 75 – N OTE Cl assi fi cati on of cond u ctors i s gi ven i n Tabl e D. 4. Table 5 – Minimum cross-sectional areas of copper conductors Type of conductor, cable Singl e core Sol id (class 1 ) or stranded (class 2) Two core, shielded Power ci rcu i ts, fi xed 1 ,0 1 ,5 0, 75 0, 75 0, 75 Power ci rcu i ts, su bj ected to freq u en t m ovem en ts 1 ,0 – 0, 75 0, 75 0, 75 Con trol ci rcu i ts 1 ,0 1 ,0 0, 2 0, 5 0, 2 – – – – 0, 08 Power ci rcu i ts (con n ecti ons not m oved ) 0, 75 0, 75 0, 75 0, 75 0, 75 Con trol ci rcu i ts 0, 2 0, 2 0, 2 0, 2 0, 2 – – – – 0, 08 Location Wi ri n g ou tsi d e (protecti n g ) en cl osu res Appl icati on Data com m u n i cati on Wi ri n g i nsi d e en cl osu res a ) M ul ti core Flexible Class 5 or 6 Data com mu n i cati on Two core Three or not shielded more cores, shi elded or not N OTE Al l cross-secti on s i n mm 2 . a) Except speci al req u i rem en ts of i nd i vi d u al stan d ard s, see al so 1 2. 1 . Class 1 and class 2 conductors are primaril y in ten ded for use between rigid , non-movin g parts where vibration is n ot consid ered to be l ikely to cause d amage. Al l cond uctors that are su bject to freq uen t movemen t (for example one movemen t per hour of machin e operation) shou ld have flexible strand ing of cl ass 5 or cl ass 6. 1 2.3 Insulation Where the insulation of conductors and cables can constitute hazards due for example to the propagation of a fire or the emission of toxic or corrosive fu mes, guid ance from the cabl e su pplier sh all be sought. I t is importan t to give special atten tion to the in tegrity of a circu it having a safety-related function . http://www.china-gauges.com/ The insul ation of cabl es and conductors used, shall be suitable for a test vol tage: – – n ot less than 2 000 V AC for a duration of 5 min for operation at vol tages higher than 50 V AC or 1 20 V DC, or n ot less than 500 V AC for a duration of 5 min for PELV circu its (see I EC 60364-4-41 , class I I I equipmen t). The mechan ical strength and thickness of the insu lation shal l be such that the insu lation cannot be damaged in operation or du ring laying, especiall y for cables pul l ed in to ducts. 1 2.4 Current-carrying capacity in normal service The curren t-carrying capacity depends on several factors, for exampl e insulation material , number of conductors in a cable, d esign (sheath), methods of instal lation , grouping and ambien t temperature. N OTE 1 Detai l ed i n formati on an d fu rth er g u i d an ce can be fou n d i n I EC 60364-5-52, i n som e n ati on al stan d ard s or g i ven by th e man u factu rer. BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 76 – I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 One typical exampl e of the current-carrying capacities for PVC insulated wiring between encl osures and in dividu al items of equ ipmen t und er stead y-state cond itions is given in Table 6. N OTE 2 For speci fi c appl i cati ons wh ere th e correct cabl e d i m en si oni n g can d epen d on th e rel ati on shi p between th e peri od of th e d u ty cycl e an d th e th ermal ti m e con stan t of the cabl e (for exam pl e starti n g ag ai nst h ig h -i n erti a l oad , i n termi tten t d u ty), th e cabl e m an u factu rer can provi d e i n formati on . Table 6 – Examples of current-carrying capacity ( Iz ) of PVC insulated copper conductors or cables under steady-state conditions in an ambient air temperature of + 40 °C for different methods of installation Install ation method (see D.2.2) B1 Cross-sectional area B2 C Current-carrying capacity mm2 Iz E for three phase ci rcuits A 0, 75 8, 6 8, 5 9, 8 1 0, 4 1 ,0 1 0, 3 1 0, 1 1 1 ,7 1 2, 4 1 ,5 1 3, 5 1 3, 1 1 5, 2 1 6, 1 2, 5 1 8, 3 1 7, 4 21 22 4 24 23 28 30 6 31 30 36 37 10 44 40 50 52 16 59 54 66 70 25 77 70 84 88 35 96 86 1 04 110 50 117 1 03 1 25 1 33 70 1 49 1 30 1 60 1 71 95 1 80 1 56 1 94 207 1 20 208 1 79 225 240 Control circuit pairs N OTE 1 0, 20 4, 5 4, 3 4, 4 4, 4 0, 5 7, 9 7, 5 7, 5 7, 8 0, 75 9, 5 9, 0 9, 5 Th e val u es of th e cu rren t-carryi n g capaci ty of Tabl e 6 are based on : 10 http://www.china-gauges.com/ – on e symm etri cal th ree-ph ase ci rcu i t for cross-secti on al areas 0, 75 mm 2 and g reater; – on e con trol ci rcu i t pai r for cross-secti on al areas between 0, 2 m m 2 an d 0, 75 m m 2 . Wh ere m ore l oad ed cabl es/pai rs are i n stal l ed , d erati n g factors for th e val u es of Tabl e 6 can be fou n d i n Tabl es D. 2 or D. 3. N OTE 2 For am bi en t tem peratu res oth er th an 40 ° C, correcti on factors for cu rren t-carryi n g capaci ti es are provi d ed i n Tabl e D. 1 . N OTE 3 Th ese val u es are n ot appl i cabl e to fl exi bl e cabl es wou n d on d ru ms (see 1 2. 6. 3). N OTE 4 Cu rren t-carryi n g capaci ti es of oth er cabl es are provi d ed i n I EC 60364-5-52. 1 2.5 Conductor and cable voltage drop The vol tage drop from the poin t of supply to the load in an y power circu it cable shall not exceed 5 % of the n ominal voltage under normal operating cond itions. I n order to con form to this req uiremen t, it can be necessary to use conductors having a larger cross-sectional area than that derived from Table 6. BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 – 77 – I n con trol circuits, the vol tage drop shal l not reduce the voltage at any d evice below the man u facturer’s specification for that device, taking into account inrush currents. See also 4. 3. The vol tage drop in componen ts, for example overcurren t protective devices and switching devices, shou ld be consid ered . 1 2.6 1 2.6.1 Flexible cables General Fl exible cables shall have Class 5 or Class 6 cond uctors. N OTE 1 Cl ass 6 cond u ctors h ave sm al l er d i am eter stran d s an d are m ore fl exi bl e than Cl ass 5 con d u ctors (see Tabl e D. 4). Cabl es that are subjected to severe du ties shall be of adeq uate construction to protect against: – – – abrasion due to mechanical hand ling and d ragging across rough surfaces; kinking due to operation withou t gu ides; stress resul ting from guid e rol lers and forced guid in g, being wound and re-wou nd on cable d rums. N OTE 2 Cabl es for su ch cond i ti on s are speci fi ed i n some n ati on al stan d ard s. N OTE 3 Th e operati on al l i fe of th e cabl e wi l l be red u ced wh ere u n favou rabl e operati n g con d i ti ons su ch as hi g h ten si l e stress, sm al l rad ii , ben d i n g i n to an other pl an e an d /or wh ere freq u en t d u ty cycl es coi nci d e. 1 2.6.2 Mechanical rating The cabl e hand ling system of the machine shall be so design ed to keep the tensile stress of the con ductors as low as is practicable durin g machine operations. Where copper con ductors are used, the tensil e stress applied to the con ductors shal l not exceed 1 5 N /mm 2 of the copper cross-sectional area. Where the demands of the application exceed the tensile stress l imit of 1 5 N /mm 2 , cables with special construction features shou ld be used an d the allowed maximal tensile stress should be agreed with the cabl e manufacturer. The maximum stress applied to the conductors of flexible cabl es with material other than copper shal l be within the cable manu facturer’s specification . http://www.china-gauges.com/ N OTE Th e fol l owi n g con d i ti ons affect th e tensi l e stress on th e con d u ctors: – accel erati on forces; – speed of m oti on ; – d ead (h an g i n g ) wei g h t of the cabl es; – m eth od of g u i d i n g ; – d esi g n of cabl e d ru m system . 1 2.6.3 Cu rrent-carrying capacity of cables wound on drums Cabl es to be woun d on drums shall be selected with cond uctors havin g a cross-section al area such that, when fu ll y wou nd on the d rum and carryin g the normal service load , the maximu m allowable con ductor temperature is not exceeded. For cables of circular cross-sectional area instal led on drums, the maximum current-carrying capacity in free air should be derated in accord ance with Table 7 N OTE Th e cu rren t-carryi n g capaci ty of cabl es i n free ai r can be fou n d i n m an u factu rers’ speci fi cati on s or i n rel evan t n ati onal stan d ards. BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 78 – I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 Table 7 – Derating factors for cables wound on drums Drum type Any number Cyl i n d ri cal ven ti l ated Number of layers of cable 1 2 3 4 – 0, 85 0, 65 0, 45 0, 35 Rad i al venti l ated 0, 85 – – – – Rad i al n on -venti l ated 0, 75 – – – – I t i s recom m en d ed th at th e u se of d erati n g factors be d i scu ssed wi th th e cabl e an d th e cabl e d ru m m an u factu rers. Th i s may resu l t i n other factors bei n g u sed . N OTE 1 A rad i al type d ru m i s on e where spi ral l ayers of cabl e are accom m od ated between cl osel y spaced fl ang es; i f fi tted wi th sol i d fl an g es, th e d rum i s d escri bed as n on -ven ti l ated and i f th e fl ang es h ave su i tabl e apertu res, as ven ti l ated . N OTE 2 A venti l ated cyl i n d er d ru m i s on e wh ere th e l ayers of cabl e are accom m od ated between wi d el y spaced fl ang es an d th e d ru m an d end fl ang es h ave ven ti l ati ng apertu res. 1 2.7 Conductor wires, conductor bars and slip-ring assemblies 1 2.7.1 Basic protection Conductor wires, con ductor bars an d slip-rin g assembl ies shal l be installed or enclosed in such a way that, during n ormal access to the machin e, basic protection is achieved by the application of one of the fol lowin g protective measu res: – – protection by partial insu lation of live parts, or where this is n ot practicable; protection by encl osures or barriers of at l east I P2X or I PXXB. H orizon tal top surfaces of barriers or enclosures that are read il y accessible shall provide a d egree of protection of at least I P4X or I PXXD. Where the requ ired degree of protection is not achieved , protection by placin g live parts out of reach in combination with emergency switching off in accordance with 9. 2. 3. 4. 3 shal l be applied . Conductor wires and cond uctor bars shal l be so pl aced and /or protected as to: – – preven t contact, especiall y for unprotected con ductor wires and conductor bars, with conductive items such as the cords of pu ll-cord switches, strain-relief devices and drive chains; http://www.china-gauges.com/ preven t damage from a swingin g l oad. See also 6. 2. 6. 1 2.7.2 Protective conductors Where conductor wires, con ductor bars an d sl ip-ring assemblies are instal led as part of the protective bond ing circuit, they shall not carry cu rren t in normal operation . Therefore, the protective conductor (PE) and the neu tral cond uctor (N ) shall each use a separate con ductor wire, cond uctor bar or sl ip-ring. The con tinuity of protective con ductors using sliding con tacts shal l be ensured by taking appropriate measures (for example, d uplication of the current collector, continu ity mon itoring). 1 2.7.3 Protective conductor current collectors Protective conductor cu rren t col lectors shall have a shape or construction so that they are n ot in terchangeable with the other curren t coll ectors. Such curren t collectors shal l be of the sliding con tact type. BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 – 79 – 1 2.7.4 Removable current collectors with a disconnector function Removable cu rren t collectors having a d iscon nector fu nction shal l be so designed that the protective conductor circu it is in terru pted onl y after the live con ductors have been d isconnected , and the continu ity of the protective con ductor circuit is re-establ ished before any l ive cond uctor is reconnected (see also 8. 2. 3). 1 2.7.5 Clearances in air Clearances between the respective conductors, and between ad jacen t systems, of conductor wires, con ductor bars, slip-ring assemblies and their current col lectors shall be suitable for at l east a rated impu lse vol tage of an overvoltage category I I I in accord ance with I EC 60664-1 . 1 2.7.6 Creepage distances Creepage distances between the respective conductors, between adjacen t systems of conductor wires, conductor bars and slip-ring assembl ies, and their curren t col lectors shal l be suitable for operation in the intended en vironmen t, for example open air, inside bu ild ings, protected by encl osures. I n abnormall y dusty, moist or corrosive en vironmen ts, the fol lowin g creepage d istance requ iremen ts appl y: – – u nprotected con ductor wires, con ductor bars, and sl ip-ring assemblies shall be equ ipped with insu lators with a minimum creepage distance of 60 mm; encl osed conductor wires, insu lated mul tipole conductor bars and insu lated individu al conductor bars shall have a minimum creepage d istance of 30 mm. The manufacturer's recommendations shal l be fol lowed regarding special measu res to preven t a gradual reduction in the insu lation valu es due to u n favourable ambien t conditions (for example d eposits of conductive dust, chemical attack). 1 2.7.7 Conductor system sectioning Where conductor wires or conductor bars are arran ged so that they can be divid ed in to isolated sections, su itabl e design measures shall be employed to preven t the energization of adj acen t sections by the cu rrent collectors themselves. 1 2.7.8 Construction and installation of conductor wire, conductor bar systems and slip-ring assemblies http://www.china-gauges.com/ Conductor wires, conductor bars an d slip-ring assemblies in power circu its shall be grouped separatel y from those in con trol circuits. Conductor wires, conductor bars and slip-rin g assemblies, in clud ing their curren t collectors, shal l be capabl e of withstand ing, withou t damage, the mechanical forces and thermal effects of short-circu it curren ts. Removable covers for conductor wire and conductor bar systems laid underground or u nderfloor shal l be so designed that they cannot be open ed by one person withou t the aid of a tool . Where conductor bars are instal led in a common metal enclosu re, the individu al sections of the enclosure shall be bonded together and conn ected to the protective bond in g circu it. M etal covers of conductor bars laid u ndergrou nd or u nderfloor shall also be bond ed together and connected to the protective bond in g circu it. BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 80 – I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 The protective bon ding circu it shall includ e the covers or cover pl ates of metal enclosu res or u nderfl oor ducts. Where metal hinges form a part of the protective bond ing circuit, their continu ity shall be verified (see Clause 1 8). Conductor bar d ucts that can be subject to accu mu lation of liq uid such as oil or water shal l have d rainage facilities. 1 3 Wiring practices 1 3.1 1 3.1 .1 Connections and routing General requirements All connections, especial ly those of the protective bond ing circu it, shall be secured against acciden tal loosen ing. The means of con nection shal l be su itabl e for the cross-section al areas and nature of the conductors being terminated. The con nection of two or more conductors to one terminal is permitted only in those cases where the terminal is design ed for that pu rpose. H owever, only one protective cond uctor shall be con nected to on e terminal con necting poin t. Soldered con nections shal l onl y be permitted where terminals are provided that are suitable for sol derin g. Terminals on terminal blocks shal l be plain ly marked or labell ed to correspond with the identification used in the d iagrams. N OTE I EC 61 666 provi d es ru l es that can be u sed for th e d esi g n ati on of termi n al s wi thi n the el ectri cal eq u i pm en t. Where an incorrect electrical conn ection (for example, arising from repl acemen t of devices) is iden tified as a sou rce of risk that n eeds to be reduced and it is n ot practicable to reduce the possibility of incorrect connection by d esign measures, the conductors and /or terminations shal l be identified . The instal lation of flexible condu its an d cables shal l be such that l iqu ids shall drain away from the fittin gs. http://www.china-gauges.com/ M eans of retaining con ductor stran ds shal l be provided when termin ating conductors at d evices or terminals that are not equipped with this facil ity. Sold er shal l n ot be used for that purpose. Shield ed con ductors shal l be so terminated as to prevent fraying of strands an d to permit easy d isconn ection . I d en tification tags shall be legible, permanen t, and appropriate for the physical en viron ment. Terminal blocks shall be moun ted and wired so that the wiring d oes n ot cross over the terminals. 1 3.1 .2 Conductor and cable runs Conductors and cables shall be run from terminal to terminal withou t spl ices or join ts. Connections usin g plug/socket combinations with su itable protection against acciden tal d isconnection are not consid ered to be splices or join ts for the purpose of 1 3. 1 . 2. BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 – 81 – Exception : Where it is impracticable to provide terminals in a junction box (for example on mobile machin es, on machines having long flexible cables; cable conn ections exceed ing a len gth which is n ot practical to be su pplied by the cabl e manufacturer on one cable drum), spl ices or j oin ts may be used . Where it is necessary to connect and discon nect cabl es and cable assembl ies, sufficien t extra len gth shal l be provided for that purpose. The termin ations of cables shall be adequately supported to preven t mechan ical stresses at the terminations of the conductors. Wherever practicabl e, the protective conductor shal l be placed cl ose to the associated live conductors in ord er to decrease the impedance of the loop. 1 3.1 .3 Conductors of different circuits Conductors of differen t circu its may be laid side by side, may occupy the same duct (for example cond uit, cable trunking system), or may be in the same mul ticon ductor cabl e or in the same plu g/socket combin ation provid ed that the arran gement does not impair the proper fu nction ing of the respective circu its and : • where those circu its operate at differen t voltages, the conductors are separated by su itabl e barriers or; • the cond uctors are insulated for the highest vol tage to which an y of the conductors can be su bjected , for example l in e to l ine voltage for un earthed systems and phase to earth vol tage for earthed systems. 1 3.1 .4 AC circuits – Electromagnetic effects (prevention of eddy currents) Conductors of AC circu its installed in ferromagnetic enclosures shall be arranged so that al l conductors of each circu it, includ ing the protective conductor of each circuit, are con tained in the same enclosu re. Where such con ductors en ter a ferrous enclosure, they shall be arranged such that the conductors are n ot in dividual ly surrounded by ferromagnetic material. Single-core cables armou red with steel wire or steel tape should not be used for AC circu its. N OTE 1 Th e steel wi re or steel tape armou r of a si n g l e-core cabl e i s regard ed as a ferrom ag n etic encl osu re. For si n g l e-core wi re armou red cabl es, th e u se of al u m i n i u m armou r i s recom m en d ed . N OTE 2 Deri ved from I EC 60364-5-52. http://www.china-gauges.com/ 1 3.1 .5 Connection between pick-up and pick-up converter of an inductive power supply system The cable between the pick-up and the pick-up con verter shal l be: – – as short as practicable; adeq uatel y protected against mechan ical d amage. N OTE Th e ou tpu t of th e pi ck-u p can be a cu rren t sou rce, therefore d am ag e to th e cabl e can resu l t i n a hi gh vol tag e h azard . 1 3.2 Identification of conductors 1 3.2.1 General requirements Each conductor shall be identifiable at each termination in accordance with the techn ical d ocumen tation. I t is recommended (for example to facil itate main tenance) that cond uctors be iden tified by n umber, alphanu meric, colour (either sol id or with one or more stripes), or a combin ation of BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 82 – I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 colour and n umbers or alphan umeric. When numbers are used , they shal l be Arabic; letters shal l be Roman (either u pper or lower case). N OTE 1 An nex B can be u sed for ag reem en t between su ppl i er and u ser regard i ng a preferred m eth od of i d en ti fi cati on . N OTE 2 I EC 62491 provi d es ru l es an d g u i d el i n es for th e l abel l i n g of cabl es an d cores/con d u ctors u sed i n i n d u stri al i nstal l ati ons, eq u i pmen t and prod u cts. 1 3.2.2 Identification of the protective conductor / protective bonding conductor The protective cond uctor / protective bon ding conductor shal l be read ily distinguishable from other con ductors by shape, location , marking, or colour. When id en tification is by col our alone, the bicolour combination GREEN -AN D-YELLOW shal l be used throu ghou t the length of the conductor. This col our iden tification is strictl y reserved for protective conductors/protective bond ing conductors. For insul ated con ductors, the bicol ou r combination GREEN -AN D-YELLOW shall be such that on any 1 5 mm l en gth, one of the colou rs covers at l east 30 % and n ot more than 70 % of the su rface of the cond uctor, the other colou r covering the remaind er of the surface. Where the protective con ductor(s) can be easil y id en tified by its shape, position , or construction (for example a braided conductor, un insulated strand ed conductor), or where the insu lated con ductor is not read il y accessible or is part of a mul ticore cabl e, colour codin g throu ghou t its length is n ot necessary. H owever, where the con ductor is not cl early visible throu ghou t its length, the ends or accessible locations shal l be clearly iden tified by the graphical symbol I EC 6041 7-501 9: 2006-08 (see Figure 1 6) or with the letters PE or by the bicolour combination GREEN -AN D-YELLOW. Figure 1 6 – Symbol IEC 6041 7-501 9 Exception : Protective bond ing cond uctors may be marked with the letters PB an d/or the symbol I EC 6041 7-5021 (2002-1 0) (see Figure 1 7). http://www.china-gauges.com/ Figure 1 7 – Symbol IEC 6041 7-5021 1 3.2.3 Identification of the neutral conductor Where a circuit inclu des a n eu tral conductor that is iden tified by colou r alone, the colour used for this conductor shall be BLU E. I n ord er to avoid con fusion with other colou rs, it is recommended that an unsaturated blu e be used , cal l ed here “l ight blue” (see 6. 2. 2 of I EC 60445: 201 0). Where the selected colour is the sole id entification of the neutral conductor, that colou r shall n ot be used for iden tifying an y other conductor where con fusion is possible. BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 – 83 – Where id en tification by colour is used , bare con ductors used as neu tral conductors shall be either coloured by a stripe, 1 5 mm to 1 00 mm wide in each compartment or unit and at each accessible location , or coloured throughou t their len gth. 1 3. 2. 4 I d e n t i fi c a t i o n by col ou r Where colou r-cod in g is u sed for id en tification of cond uctors (other than the protective conductor (see 1 3. 2. 2) an d the neu tral conductor (see 1 3. 2. 3)), the fol lowing colours may be used : BLACK, BROWN , RED, ORAN GE, YELLOW, GREEN , BLU E (includ ing LI GH T BLU E), VI OLET, GREY, WH I TE, PI N K, TU RQU OI SE. N OTE Th i s l i st of col ou rs i s d eri ved from I EC 60757. I t is recommended that, where col our is used for iden tification , the colour be used throughout the l ength of the con ductor either by the colou r of the insu lation or by colour markers at regular intervals and at the en ds or accessible location . For safety reasons, the colour GREEN or the colou r YELLOW shou ld not be used where there is a possibility of con fusion with the bicolour combination GREEN -AN D-YELLOW (see 1 3. 2. 2). Colour id en tification usin g combin ations of those colou rs listed above may be used provided there can be n o con fusion and that GREEN or YELLOW is n ot used except in the bicolour combin ation GREEN -AN D-YELLOW. Where colour-cod in g is used for iden tification of conductors, it is recommended that they be colour-coded as foll ows: – – – – BLACK: RED: BLU E: ORAN GE: AC and DC power circu its; AC control circu its; DC con trol circu its; excepted circu its in accordance with 5. 3. 5. Exceptions to the above are permitted where insul ation is n ot available in the colours recommended (for example in mu lticonductor cables). 1 3. 3 W i ri n g i n s i d e e n c l o s u re s Conductors inside enclosu res shal l be supported where n ecessary to keep them in place. http://www.china-gauges.com/ N on-metallic ducts shall be permitted onl y when they are made with a fl ame-retardan t insu latin g material (see the I EC 60332 series). I t is recommen ded that electrical equ ipment mou nted inside enclosures be d esign ed and constructed in such a way as to permit mod ification of the wirin g from the front of the encl osure (see also 1 1 . 2. 1 ). Where that is not practicable and control d evices are con nected from the rear of the enclosure, access doors or swingou t panels shall be provided . Connections to d evices mou n ted on d oors or to other movable parts shal l be mad e using fl exible conductors in accordance with 1 2. 2 and 1 2. 6 to al low for the frequ en t movemen t of the part. The con ductors shall be anchored to the fixed part and to the movabl e part ind ependen tl y of the electrical connection (see also 8. 2. 3 and 1 1 . 2. 1 ). Conductors and cabl es that do not run in ducts shall be adequately supported . Terminal blocks or plug/socket combinations shal l be used for con trol wirin g that extends beyon d the enclosure. For plug/socket combinations, see also 1 3. 4. 5 an d 1 3. 4. 6. BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 84 – I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 Power cabl es and cables of measurin g circu its may be directl y connected to the terminals of the devices for which the connections were in tended. 1 3.4 1 3.4.1 Wiring outside enclosures General requirements The means of in troduction of cabl es or ducts with their ind ivid ual gl ands, bushin gs, etc. , in to an enclosure shall ensure that the degree of protection is not reduced (see 1 1 . 3). Conductors of a circuit shal l not be distribu ted over differen t mul ti-core cables, condu its, cable d ucting systems or cable tru nking systems. This is n ot requ ired where a nu mber of mu l ti-core cabl es, forming on e circu it, are installed in paral lel . Where mu lti -core cabl es are installed in paral lel , each cable shal l con tain one conductor of each phase and the n eu tral if an y. 1 3.4.2 External ducts Conductors and their connections external to the electrical equ ipment enclosure(s) shal l be encl osed in suitable d ucts (i. e. condu it or cabl e trunking systems) as described in 1 3. 5 except for su itably protected cables that may be instal led withou t ducts and with or withou t the use of cabl e trays or cable support means. Where devices such as position switches or proximity switches are supplied with a dedicated cable, their cable need not be enclosed in a duct when the cable is su itabl e for the purpose, su fficien tly short, and so located or protected, that the risk of d amage is min imized . Fittings used with ducts or cables shall be suitable for the physical en vironmen t. Flexible cond uit or fl exibl e mu l ticon ductor cable shal l be used where it is n ecessary to employ fl exible con nections to pendan t push-bu tton stations. The weight of the pendan t stations shall be supported by means other than the flexible condu it or the flexible mu l ticonductor cable, except where the condu it or cable is specifical ly d esigned for that purpose. 1 3.4.3 Connection to moving elements of the machine The design of conn ections to moving parts shall take in to account the foreseeable frequency of movement and shall be made using conductors in accord ance with 1 2. 2 and 1 2. 6. Fl exibl e cabl e an d flexible condu it shall be so instal led as to avoid excessive flexin g and straining, particu larl y at the fittings. Cabl es subject to movemen t shall be supported in such a way that there is no mechan ical strain on the connection points nor any sharp flexing. When this is http://www.china-gauges.com/ achieved by the provision of a loop, it shall have su fficien t length to provid e for a ben ding rad ius of the cabl e as specified by the cable manu facturer or if no such specification is given , at l east 1 0 times the d iameter of the cable. Flexible cables of machin es shal l be so instal led or protected as to min imize the possibil ity of extern al damage du e to factors that includ e the fol lowin g cabl e use or poten tial abuse: – – – – – – – being run over by the machine itself; being run over by vehicles or other machines; coming in to con tact with the machine structure during movemen ts; runnin g in an d ou t of cable baskets, or on or off cable drums; accel eration forces an d wind forces on festoon systems or suspen ded cabl es; excessive rubbing by cable col lector; exposure to excessive rad iated heat. BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 – 85 – The cable sheath shal l be resistan t to the normal wear that can be expected from movemen t and to the effects of en vironmen tal contaminan ts (for example oil , water, cool ants, d ust). Where cables subject to movemen t are close to movin g parts, precau tions shal l be taken to main tain a space of at l east 25 mm between the moving parts and the cables. Where that d istance is n ot practicable, fixed barriers shal l be provid ed between the cables and the moving parts. The cable hand ling system shall be so d esigned that l ateral cabl e angles do not exceed 5 ° , avoiding torsion in the cable when : – – being woun d on an d off cable drums; and approachin g and leaving cable gu id ance devices. M easures shall be taken to ensure that at l east two turns of fl exible cables always remain on a dru m. Devices serving to gu id e an d carry a flexible cable shall be so designed that the inner bend in g radius at all poin ts where the cabl e is ben t is not less than the values given in Table 8, un less otherwise agreed with the cable manu facturer, taking in to accou n t the permissible tension and the expected fatigue life. Table 8 – Minimum permitted bending radii for the forced guiding of flexible cables Application Cable diameter or thickness of flat cable ( d) mm d≤8 8 < d ≤ 20 d > 20 Cabl e d ru ms 6d 6d 8d Gu i d e rol l ers 6d 8d 8d Festoon system s 6d 6d 8d Al l oth ers 6d 6d 8d The straight section between two bends shall be at l east 20 times the diameter of the cable. Where flexible conduit is ad jacen t to moving parts, the construction an d supportin g means shal l prevent d amage to the flexible condu it u nder al l con ditions of operation. http://www.china-gauges.com/ Flexible cond uit shall not be used for conn ections subject to rapid or frequen t movemen ts except when specificall y d esigned for that purpose. 1 3.4.4 Interconnection of devices on the machine Where several machine-mou n ted devices (for exampl e position sensors, push-bu ttons) are connected in series or in parallel , it is recommended that the conn ections between those d evices be mad e through terminals forming in termed iate test poin ts. Such terminals shal l be conveniently placed, adeq uatel y protected , and shown on the rel evan t diagrams. 1 3.4.5 Plug/socket combinations Componen ts or devices insid e an enclosure, terminated by fixed plu g/socket combinations (no fl exible cable), or componen ts connected to a bus system by a pl ug/socket combination , are n ot consid ered to be plug/socket combinations for the purpose of this 1 3. 4. 5. After instal lation in accord ance with item a) below, plu g/socket combin ations shal l be of such a type as to preven t un inten tional con tact with l ive parts at any time, includ in g du ring insertion BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 86 – I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 or removal of the con nectors. The degree of protection shall be at least I P2X or I PXXB. PELV circu its are excepted from this req uiremen t. Where the pl ug/socket con tains a contact for the protective bond ing circuit, it shal l have a first make last break con tact (see also 8. 2. 4). Pl ug/socket combin ations in ten ded to be connected or disconnected during load con ditions shal l have su fficien t l oad -breaking capacity. Where the plug/socket combination is rated at 30 A, or greater, it shal l be in terlocked with a switching device so that the connection and d isconnection is possible only when the switching d evice is in the OFF position . Pl ug/socket combin ations that are rated at more than 1 6 A shal l have a retaining means to preven t un intended or acciden tal d isconnection . Where an un in tend ed or accid ental d iscon nection of plug/socket combin ations can cause a hazardous situation , they shal l have a retainin g means. The instal lation of plug/socket combinations shal l fu lfil the following req uiremen ts as applicable: a) The component which remains l ive after d isconnection shal l have a d egree of protection of at least I P2X or I PXXB, taking in to accou nt the requ ired cl earance and creepage d istances. PELV circuits are excepted from this requ iremen t. b) M etallic housin gs of plug/socket combin ations shall be connected to the protective bond in g circuit. c) Pl ug/socket combin ations in tended to carry power loads bu t n ot to be d isconnected du ring l oad cond itions shall have a retain in g means to preven t u nin tend ed or accidental d isconnection and shall be clearl y marked that they are n ot in tended to be discon nected u nder l oad . d) Where more than one plug/socket combination is provid ed in the same el ectrical equ ipmen t, the associated combinations shal l be cl earl y iden tifiable. I t is recommended that mechanical cod in g be used to preven t incorrect insertion. e) Pl ug/socket combin ations used in con trol circuits shall ful fil the applicable req uiremen ts of I EC 61 984. Exception : I n plug/socket combinations in accord ance with I EC 60309-1 , on l y those con tacts shall be used for con trol circuits which are in tend ed for those pu rposes. This exception d oes not apply to control circuits using high freq uency signals superimposed on the power circu its. 1 3.4.6 Dismantling for shipment http://www.china-gauges.com/ Where it is necessary that wiring be disconn ected for shipment, terminals or plug/socket combin ations shal l be provided at the section al poin ts. Such terminals shall be suitably enclosed and plu g/socket combinations shall be protected from the physical environment during transportation and storage. 1 3.4.7 Additional conductors Consideration should be given to providin g ad ditional cond uctors for main tenance or repair. When spare conductors are provided, they shall be connected to spare terminals or isolated in such a mann er as to preven t con tact with live parts. 1 3.5 Ducts, connection boxes and other boxes 1 3.5.1 General requirements Ducts shall provide a degree of protection (see I EC 60529) su itable for the appl ication. BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 – 87 – All sharp ed ges, flash, burrs, rou gh surfaces, or threads with which the insu lation of the conductors can come in con tact shall be removed from ducts and fittings. Where necessary, add itional protection consisting of a flame-retardan t, oil-resistan t insu lating material shall be provided to protect conductor insu lation . Drain holes of 6 mm d iameter are permitted in cabl e trunking systems, connection boxes, and other boxes used for wiring pu rposes that can be subj ect to accu mu lations of oil or moisture. I n order to preven t confusion of condu its with oil , air, or water piping, it is recommended that the con du its be either physicall y separated or suitably id en tified . Ducts and cabl e trays shal l be rigidly supported and position ed at a sufficient distance from moving parts an d in such a manner so as to minimize the possibil ity of damage or wear. I n areas where hu man passage is requ ired , the ducts an d cable trays shall be moun ted at least 2 m above the working surface. Cabl e trays that are partiall y covered shou ld n ot be considered to be ducts or cable tru nking systems (see 1 3. 5. 6), an d the cables used shal l be of a type su itabl e for install ation on open cabl e trays. I t is recommended that the dimensions and arran gemen t of d ucts be such as to facil itate the insertion of the conductors and cables. 1 3.5.2 Rigid metal conduit and fittings Rigid metal conduit and fittings shall be of gal vanized steel or of a corrosion -resistant material su itabl e for the con ditions. Where galvanic action is possible between dissimilar metals metal these combinations shall not be used. Condu its shal l be securel y hel d in place an d supported at each end . Fittings shall be compatible with the condu it an d appropriate for the application . Fittings shou ld be threaded u nless structural d ifficul ties prevent assembl y. Where thread less fittings are used , the cond uit shal l be securel y fastened to the equ ipmen t. Condu it bends shall be mad e in such a manner that the cond uit shall n ot be damaged and the in ternal d iameter of the condu it shal l n ot be effectivel y reduced . 1 3.5.3 Flexible metal condu it and fittings http://www.china-gauges.com/ A flexibl e metal conduit shal l consist of a fl exibl e metal tu bing or woven wire armour. I t shall be su itable for the expected physical environ men t. Fittings shall be compatible with the condu it and appropriate for the appl ication . 1 3.5.4 Flexible non-metallic conduit and fittings Fl exibl e non -metal lic condu it shal l be resistan t to kinking and shall have physical characteristics similar to those of the sheath of mu l ticon ductor cables. The cond uit shall be su itable for use in the expected physical en viron men t. Fittings shall be compatible with the conduit and appropriate for the appl ication. 1 3.5.5 Cable trunking systems Cabl e trunkin g systems external to enclosu res shall be rigid l y supported and cl ear of all moving parts of the machin e and of sources of con tamination. BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 88 – I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 Covers shall be shaped to overlap the sid es; gaskets shall be permitted. Covers shal l be attached to cabl e trunkin g systems by su itable means. On horizon tal cabl e trunking systems, the cover shal l not be on the bottom u nl ess specificall y design ed for such instal lation. N OTE Req u i rem en ts for cabl e tru nki n g an d d u cti n g systems for el ectri cal i nstal l ati ons are g i ven i n th e I EC 61 084 seri es. Where the cabl e trunking system is furn ished in sections, the join ts between sections shall fit tightly bu t need not be gasketed . The on ly openings permitted shall be those req uired for wiring or for d rain age. Cabl e trunkin g systems shal l not have opened bu t un used knockou ts. 1 3.5.6 Machine compartments and cable trunking systems The use of compartmen ts or cable tru nking systems within the colu mn or base of a machine to encl ose conductors is permitted provided the compartmen ts or cabl e trunking systems are isolated from coolan t or oil reservoirs and are en tirel y enclosed . Conductors run in enclosed compartments and cable tru nking systems shal l be so secured an d arran ged that they are n ot su bj ect to damage. 1 3.5.7 Connection boxes and other boxes Connection boxes and other boxes used for wirin g pu rposes shal l be accessible for main tenance. Those boxes shall provide protection against the ingress of solid bod ies and l iqu ids, takin g into accoun t the external in fl uences und er which the machine is in tended to operate (see 1 1 . 3). Those boxes shal l not have opened but u nused knockou ts nor an y other open ings and shall be so constructed as to exclu de materials such as d ust, fl yin gs, oil , an d cool an t. 1 3.5.8 Motor connection boxes M otor connection boxes shall enclose onl y connections to the motor and motor-mou nted d evices (for example brakes, temperatu re sensors, pl uggin g switches, tachometer generators). 1 4 Electric motors and associated equipment 1 4.1 General requirements http://www.china-gauges.com/ El ectric motors shoul d con form to the relevant parts of I EC 60034 series. The protection requ iremen ts for motors and associated equ ipment are given in 7. 2 for overcurrent protection , in 7. 3 for protection of motors against overheating, and in 7. 6 for overspeed protection . As man y con trollers do n ot switch off the supply to a motor when it is at rest, care shal l be taken to ensure compliance with the requ iremen ts of 5. 3, 5. 4, 5. 5, 7. 5, 7. 6 and 9. 4. M otor con trol equ ipmen t shal l be located an d moun ted in accord ance with Clause 1 1 . 1 4.2 Motor enclosures Enclosures for motors should be in accordance with I EC 60034-5. The d egree of protection shall be dependen t on the application an d the physical en vironmen t (see 4. 4). All motors shal l be adeq uately protected from mechanical damage. BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 1 4.3 – 89 – Motor dimensions As far as is practicable, the dimensions of motors shall con form to those given in the I EC 60072 series. 1 4.4 Motor mounting and compartments Each motor and its associated couplings, bel ts, pulleys, or chains, shall be so mou nted that they are ad equ ately protected and are easily accessible for inspection , maintenance, adj ustmen t and alignmen t, l ubrication , and replacemen t. The motor moun ting arran gement shal l be such that al l motor mou n tin g means can be removed and all terminal boxes are accessible. M otors shal l be so moun ted that proper cooling is ensured and the temperature rise remains within the l imits of the insul ation class (see I EC 60034-1 ). Where practicable, motor compartments shoul d be clean and d ry, an d when requ ired , shal l be ven tilated d irectl y to the exterior of the machine. The ven ts shall be such that in gress of swarf, dust, or water spray is at an acceptable level. There shal l be no open ing between the motor compartmen t and an y other compartmen t that does not meet the motor compartmen t req uiremen ts. Where a condu it or pipe is run in to the motor compartmen t from another compartmen t n ot meeting the motor compartment requ iremen ts, an y clearance around the condu it or pipe shall be sealed . 1 4.5 Criteria for motor selection The characteristics of motors and associated equ ipmen t shall be selected in accordance with the an ticipated service an d physical environ men tal con ditions (see 4. 4). I n this respect, the points that shal l be consid ered incl ude: – – – – – – – – – – – type of motor; type of d u ty cycle (see I EC 60034-1 ); fixed speed or variabl e speed operation, (and the consequen t variable in fl uence of the ven tilation); mechanical vibration ; type of motor con trol ; temperatu re rise and other effects of the frequency spectrum of the vol tage and /or curren t ); feed ing the motor (particularl y when it is suppl ied from a con verter http://www.china-gauges.com/ method of startin g and the possibl e in flu ence of the in rush curren t on the operation of other users of the same power supply, takin g also into accoun t possibl e special considerations stipul ated by the su ppl y au thority; variation of coun ter-torqu e l oad with time an d speed ; in fluence of l oads with large inertia; in fluence of constan t torq ue or constan t power operation ; possibl e need of inductive reactors between motor an d con verter. 1 4.6 Protective devices for mechanical brakes Operation of the overl oad and overcu rren t protective d evices for mechan ical brake actuators shal l in itiate the simu l taneous de-energization (release) of the associated machin e actu ators. N OTE Associ ated m ach i n e actu ators are th ose associ ated wi th th e same m oti on , for exam pl e cabl e d ru m s an d l on g -travel d rives. BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 90 – I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 1 5 Socket-outlets and lighting 1 5.1 Socket-outlets for accessories Where the machin e or its associated eq uipmen t is provided with socket-ou tlets that are in tended to be used for accessory eq uipment (for example hand-held power tools, test equ ipmen t), the foll owing apply: – – – – – – the socket-ou tl ets should con form to I EC 60309-1 . Where that is n ot practicable, they shou ld be clearly marked with the vol tage an d curren t ratings; the con tin uity of the protective bon din g circu it to the socket-ou tlet shall be ensu red ; al l un earthed cond uctors connected to the socket-ou tl et shal l be protected against overcurrent an d , when requ ired, against overl oad in accord ance with 7. 2 and 7. 3 separately from the protection of other circu its; where the power supply to the socket-ou tlet is not d isconn ected by the suppl y disconnecting device for the machin e or the section of the machine, the requ iremen ts of 5. 3. 5 apply; where fau l t protection is provid ed by au tomatic discon nection of suppl y, the disconn ection time shal l be in accord ance with Table A. 1 for TN systems or Table A. 2 for TT systems; circuits supplying socket-ou tl ets with a curren t rating n ot exceeding 20 A shall be provid ed with resid ual curren t protection (RCDs) with a rated operating current n ot exceeding 30 mA. 1 5.2 1 5.2.1 Local lighting of the machine and of the equipment General The ON /OFF switch shal l not be incorporated in the lampholder or in the flexible connecting cord. Stroboscopic effects from l ights shall be avoided by the selection of appropriate luminaires. Where fixed lighting is provided in an enclosure, electromagnetic compatibil ity shoul d be taken in to accoun t usin g the principles ou tlined in 4. 4. 2. 1 5.2.2 Supply The nominal vol tage of the local l ighting circu it shal l not exceed 250 V between con ductors. A voltage n ot exceedin g 50 V between conductors is recommen ded . http://www.china-gauges.com/ Lighting circuits shall be supplied from one of the fol lowing sou rces (see al so 7. 2. 6): – – – – – a d ed icated isolating transformer connected to the load sid e of the suppl y disconn ecting device. Overcu rren t protection shall be provided in the secondary circu it; a dedicated isolating transformer connected to the line side of the supply disconnectin g device. That source shal l be permitted for main tenance l ighting circu its in con trol encl osures only. Overcu rrent protection shall be provid ed in the secondary circuit (see also 5. 3. 5); a circu it of the electrical equ ipmen t of the machin e for lighting, with d edicated overcu rren t protection ; an isolating transformer conn ected to the l in e side of the su ppl y d isconnectin g device, provided with a dedicated primary d isconn ecting means (see 5. 3. 5) and second ary overcurren t protection , and mou n ted within the con trol encl osu re adjacent to the su pply disconnecting device; an external ly suppl ied lighting circu it (for exampl e factory lighting supply). This shal l be permitted in con trol encl osu res on ly, an d for the machin e work light(s) where their total power rating is not more than 3 kW; BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 – – 91 – power supply u nits, for DC su ppl y to LED light sources, fitted with isolatin g transformers (for example, in accord ance with I EC 61 558-2-6). Exception : where fixed l ighting is ou t of reach of operators durin g n ormal operations, the provisions of 1 5. 2. 2 do not appl y. 1 5.2.3 Protection Local l ighting circuits shal l be protected in accord ance with 7. 2. 6. 1 5.2.4 Fittings Adjustable lighting fittings shall be suitable for the physical environment. The lamphold ers shall be: – – in accord ance with the relevant I EC standard ; constructed with an insulating material protectin g the l amp cap so as to preven t u nin ten tional con tact. Reflectors shal l be supported by a bracket an d not by the lamphol der. Exception : where fixed l ighting is ou t of reach of operators durin g n ormal operation , the provisions of 1 5. 2. 4 do not appl y. 1 6 Marking, warning signs and reference designations 1 6.1 General Warn ing signs, nameplates, markings, labels and iden tification plates shall be of sufficient d urabil ity to withstand the physical en vironmen t in vol ved . The markings shall be suff ciently durable to remain legible for the foreseen lifetime of the machine. 1 6.2 1 6.2.1 Warning signs Electric shock hazard Enclosures that d o not otherwise clearl y show that they con tain electrical equ ipment that can give rise to a risk of electric shock shal l be marked with the graphical symbol I SO 701 0-W01 2 (see Figure 1 8). http://www.china-gauges.com/ Figure 1 8 – Symbol ISO 701 0-W01 2 The warning sign shall be plainl y visible on the enclosure door or cover. The warn ing sign may be omitted (see also 6. 2. 2 b)) for: – – – an enclosure equipped with a supply d isconnecting device; an operator-machin e interface or con trol station; a sin gl e device with its own enclosu re (for example position sensor). BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 92 – 1 6.2.2 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 Hot surfaces hazard Where the risk assessmen t shows the need to warn against the possibil ity of hazard ous su rface temperatures of the el ectrical equipment, the graphical symbol I SO 701 0-W01 7 shall be used (see Figure 1 9). Figure 1 9 – Symbol ISO 701 0-W01 7 N OTE I SO 1 3732-1 g i ves gu i d ance for the assessm en t of th e ri sks of bu rn s when h u m ans m i gh t tou ch h ot su rfaces wi th th ei r u n protected ski n . 1 6.3 Functional identification Control devices and visu al ind icators shal l be clearl y and durabl y marked with regard to their fu nctions either on or adjacen t to the item. I t is recommend ed that such markings are mad e in accord ance with I EC 6041 7 and I SO 7000. 1 6.4 Marking of enclosures of electrical equipment The following in formation shall be legibl y an d du rabl y marked in a way that is pl ain ly visible after the equipmen t is instal led on enclosures that receive incoming power su ppl ies: • name or trad e mark of su pplier; • type designation or model , where applicable; • serial number where appl icable; • main d ocumen t nu mber (see I EC 62023) where applicable; • rated voltage, nu mber of phases an d frequ ency (if AC), an d fu l l-load cu rrent for each incoming suppl y. Text deleted I t is recommended that this information is provided ad jacent to the main incomin g suppl y(ies). http://www.china-gauges.com/ 1 6.5 Reference designations All enclosures, assemblies, con trol d evices, and components shal l be plain l y iden tified with the same reference designation as shown in the techn ical documen tation. 1 7 Technical documentation 1 7.1 General The information necessary for iden tification , transport, installation, use, maintenance, d ecommissioning and d isposal of the el ectrical equ ipment shall be supplied . N OTE 1 Docu m en tati on i s som eti m es su ppl i ed i n paper form, si nce i t can n ot be assu m ed th at th e u ser h as access to th e m ean s of read i n g i nstructi ons su ppl i ed i n el ectroni c form or m ad e avai labl e on an I ntern et si te. H owever, i t i s often u seful for th e d ocu m en tati on to be mad e avai l abl e i n el ectroni c form and on th e I n ternet as wel l as i n paper form, si nce th i s en abl es th e u ser to d own l oad th e el ectroni c fi le i f h e so wish es an d to recover th e d ocu men tati on i f th e paper copy h as been l ost. Th i s practi ce al so faci l i tates th e u pd ati ng of th e d ocu m en tati on wh en th i s i s n ecessary. BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 – 93 – N OTE 2 I n som e cou n tri es, th e req u i rem en t to u se speci fi c l an g u ag e(s) i s covered by l egal req u i rem en ts. Annex I shou ld be consid ered as guid ance for the preparation of in formation and docu men ts. 1 7. 2 I n fo rm a t i o n re l a t e d t o t h e e l e c t ri c a l eq u i pm en t The fol lowing shall be suppl ied : a) where more than one docu men t is provid ed , a main docu men t for the electrical equ ipmen t as a whole, l isting the complemen tary docu men ts associated with the el ectrical equ ipmen t; b) identification of the electrical equipment (see 1 6. 4); c) in formation on install ation and moun ting including: • a d escription of the electrical equ ipment’s install ation and moun ting, and its con nection to the electrical su pplies and where relevan t other su ppl ies; • short-circu it curren t rating of the electrical equ ipmen t for each incomin g power supply; • rated voltage, nu mber of phases and freq uency (if AC. ), type of d istribu tion system (TT, TN , I T) and fu l l-load curren t for each incomin g supply; • an y ad ditional electrical su ppl y(ies) requ irements (for example maximum su ppl y source imped ance, l eakage curren t) for each incoming suppl y; • space requ ired for the removal or servicing of the electrical eq uipmen t; • installation requiremen ts where need ed to ensure that the arran gemen ts for cooling are n ot impaired; • en viron men tal limitations (for example lighting, atmospheric con taminants) where appropriate; • fu nctional l imitations (for example peak starting curren ts an d permitted vol tage d rop(s)) as applicable; vibration, EM C en vironment, precau tions to be taken for the instal l ation of the electrical equ ipmen t relevan t to the electromagnetic compatibility; d) an instruction for the connection of simul taneously accessible extran eous-con ductiveparts in the vicinity of the machine (for example, within 2, 5 metres) such as the foll owing to the protective bond ing circu it: • • metal lic pipes; • fences; • l adders; http://www.china-gauges.com/ hand rails. e) in formation on the functioning and operation , includ in g as appl icable: • • an overview of the structure of the electrical equipment (for example by structure diagram or overview d iagram); • procedures for programming or con figuring, as necessary for the in tended use; • procedures for restarting after an unexpected stop; a sequ ence of operation ; f) in formation on main ten ance of the electrical equ ipmen t, as appropriate, inclu ding: • • frequ ency and method of fu nctional testin g; • instructions on the procedures for safe main tenance and where it is n ecessary to suspend a safety function and /or protective measu re (see 9. 3. 6); • guidance on the ad justmen t, repair, and frequency and method of preven tive main tenance; BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 94 – I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 • details of the in tercon nections of the electrical componen ts su bject to replacemen t (for example by circuit d iagrams and/or connection tables); • in formation on requ ired special devices or tools; • information on spare parts; • information on possible residual risks, in dication of whether an y particu lar train ing is required an d specification of an y necessary personal protective equipmen t; • where appl icable, instructions to restrict availability of key(s) or tool(s) to skill ed or instructed persons on l y; • settin gs (DI P-switches, programmabl e parameter valu es, etc); in formation for validation of safety related con trol fu nctions after repair or mod ification , and for period ic testin g where necessary; g) in formation on hand lin g, transportation and storage as appropriate (for example dimensions, weight, environmental conditions, possible agein g constraints); h) in formation for proper d isassembl y an d hand ling of compon en ts (for example for recycling or disposal). • 1 8 Verifi cati on 1 8.1 General The exten t of verification will be given in the d ed icated product stand ard for a particu lar machin e. Where there is no ded icated prod uct stand ard for the machin e, the verifications shall always incl ude the items a), b), c) an d h) an d may includ e one or more of the items d) to g): a) verification that the el ectrical equ ipment complies with its techn ical d ocu men tation; b) verification of con tinuity of the protective bond ing circuit (Test 1 of 1 8. 2. 2); c) in case of faul t protection by au tomatic d isconnection of suppl y, cond itions for protection by au tomatic d isconnection shall be verified according to 1 8. 2; d ) insu lation resistance test (see 1 8. 3); e) voltage test (see 1 8. 4); f) protection against residu al vol tage (see 1 8. 5); g) verification that the rel evan t requ irements of 8. 2. 6 are met; h) functional tests (see 1 8. 6). http://www.china-gauges.com/ Where the sequence cannot be followed veri cation a) and b) shall be conducted rst. When these tests are performed , it is recommended that they fol low the sequence l isted above. f f When the electrical equ ipmen t is mod ified , the requiremen ts stated in 1 8. 7 shall appl y. For verifications that includ e measu remen t, measurin g equ ipmen t in accord ance with the I EC 61 557 series is recommended . The resul ts of the verification shall be docu men ted . 1 8.2 1 8.2.1 Verifi cati on of con di ti on s for protecti on by au tomatic discon n ecti on of su ppl y Gen eral The cond itions for au tomatic d isconnection of suppl y (see 6. 3. 3) shall be verified by tests. Test 1 verifies the con tinuity of the protective bond ing circuit. BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 – 95 – Test 2 verifies the conditions for protection by au tomatic disconnection of the supply in TN systems. For TN -systems, those test methods are described in 1 8. 2. 2 and 1 8. 2. 3; their application for d ifferen t cond itions of suppl y are specified in 1 8. 2. 4. For TT systems, see Clause A. 2. For I T systems, see I EC 60364-6. Where RCDs are used in the electrical eq uipmen t, their function shal l be verified in accord ance with the man u facturer’s instructions. The test procedure and test in terval shal l be specified in the main tenance instructions. 1 8.2.2 Test 1 – Verification of the continuity of the protective bonding circuit The resistance between the PE terminal (see 5. 2 and Figu re 4) and relevan t poin ts that are part of the protective bonding circu it shal l be measured with a curren t between at least 0, 2 A and approximately 1 0 A derived from an electricall y separated supply source (for example SELV, see 41 4 of I EC 60364-4-41 : 2005) having a maximum no-load vol tage of 24 V AC or DC. The resistance measured shal l be in the expected range accord ing to the length, the cross sectional area and the material of the rel ated protective con ductors and protective bon ding conductor(s). Earthed PELV supplies can produce mislead ing resu l ts in this test an d therefore shal l n ot be used . N OTE Larg er cu rren ts u sed for th e con ti n u i ty test i n creases th e accu racy of th e test resu l t, especi al l y wi th l ow resi stance val u es, i . e. l arg er cross secti on al areas an d /or l ower con d u ctor l en g th s. 1 8.2.3 Test 2 – Fault loop impedance verification and suitability of the associated overcurrent protective device The conn ections of each power suppl y includ in g the connection of the associated protective conductor to the PE terminal of the machine, shall be verified by inspection . The con ditions for the protection by au tomatic d isconnection of suppl y in accord ance with 6. 3. 3 and Annex A shal l be verified by both: http://www.china-gauges.com/ a) verification of the faul t loop imped ance by: – calcu lation, or – measuremen t in accordance with A. 1 . 4, and b) con firmation that the setting and characteristics of the associated overcu rrent protective d evice are in accord ance with the requ irements of Ann ex A, and where a power drive system (PDS) is used, con firmation that the setting and characteristics of the protective device(s) associated with a PDS are in accord ance with the converter manu facturer’s an d protective device manufacturer’s instructions. 1 8.2.4 Application of the test methods for TN-systems When Test 2 of 1 8. 2. 3 is carried out by measuremen t, it shal l always be preceded by Test 1 of 1 8. 2. 2. N OTE A d iscon ti n u ity of th e protecti ve bond i n g ci rcu i t can cau se a hazard ou s si tu ati on for th e tester or oth er persons, or d am ag e to the el ectri cal eq u i pm en t d u ri n g th e l oop i m ped an ce test. The tests that are n ecessary for machines of d ifferen t status are specified in Table 9. BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 96 – I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 Table 9 – Application of the test methods for TN-systems Procedure A B Machine status El ectri cal eq u i pm en t of m achi nes, erected an d con n ected on si te, wh ere th e con ti n u i ty of th e protecti ve bon d i n g ci rcu i ts h as n ot been con fi rmed fol l owi n g erecti on an d con n ecti on on si te. M achi n e su ppl i ed wi th confi rmati on of th e veri fi cati on (see 1 8. 1 ) of conti n u i ty of th e protecti ve bon d i n g ci rcu i ts by test 1 or wi th th e resu l ts of a test 2 by m easu rem en t, h avi n g protecti ve bon d i n g ci rcu i ts exceed i n g th e cabl e l en g th for wh i ch exam pl es are g i ven i n Tabl e 1 0. Case B1 ) su ppl i ed ful l y assembl ed an d n ot d ism antl ed for shi pm ent, C Verification on site Test 1 (see 1 8. 2. 2) an d test 2 (see 1 8. 2. 3) Excepti on: Test 2 i s n ot req u i red where: – test 1 i s performed on th e protecti ve bon d i n g con d u ctors of th e machi n e th at are con n ected on si te, and ; – th e con n ecti ons of each i n com i n g power su ppl y an d of th e associ ated protecti ve con d u ctor (PE) to th e PE-termi n al of th e m achi n e, are veri fi ed by i n specti on, an d previ ou s cal cu l ati on s of th e fau l t l oop i m ped ance (or resi stan ce) by th e m an u factu rer of th e el ectri cal eq u i pm en t are avai l abl e, an d : – th e arran g em en t of th e i nstal l ati ons permi ts th e veri fi cati on of th e l en gth an d cross-secti on al area of th e con d u ctors u sed for th e cal cu l ati on , an d ; – i t can be con fi rmed th rou g h cal cu l ati on or m easu rem ent, or by i n formati on su ppl i ed by th e cu stomer, th at th e su ppl y sou rce i m ped ance on si te d oes n ot exceed th e val u e speci fi ed by th e m an u factu rer of th e el ectri cal eq u i pm en t. See 1 7. 2 c), fou rth bu l l et). Test 2 (see 1 8. 2. 3) Excepti on: Wh ere i t can be con fi rmed th rou g h cal cu l ati on or m easu rem ent, or by i n formation su ppl i ed by th e cu stom er, th at th e su ppl y sou rce i m ped an ce on si te d oes n ot exceed th e val u e speci fi ed by th e m an u factu rer of the el ectri cal eq u i pm en t, or that of th e test su ppl y d u ri n g a test 2 by m easu rem en t, n o test i s req u i red on si te apart from veri fi cati on of the con n ecti ons: • i n case B1 ) of each i ncom i n g power su ppl y an d of th e associ ated protecti ve con d u ctor to th e PE termi n al of th e m achi n e; i n case B2) of each i ncom i n g power su ppl y an d of th e associ ated protecti ve con d u ctor http://www.china-gauges.com/ to th e PE termi n al of th e m achi n e an d of al l con n ecti on s of th e protecti ve con d u ctor(s) th at were d i scon n ected for sh i pmen t. Case B2) su ppl i ed d i sm an tl ed for sh i pm en t, wh ere th e con ti n u i ty of protecti ve con d u ctors i s ensu red after d i sm antl i ng , tran sportati on an d reassem bl y (for exam pl e by th e u se of pl u g/socket con n ecti on s). • M ach i n e h avin g protecti ve bon d i n g ci rcu i ts n ot exceed i n g th e cabl e l en g th for whi ch exam pl es are gi ven i n Tabl e 1 0, su ppl i ed wi th con fi rmati on of th e veri fi cati on (see 1 8. 1 ) of con ti n u i ty of the protecti ve bon d i n g ci rcu i ts by test 1 . For case C1 or C2, n o test i s req u i red on si te. For a m achi n e n ot con n ected to th e power su ppl y by a pl u g /socket com bi n ation , th e correct con necti on of th e extern al protective con d u ctor to the PE-termi n al of th e m achi n e sh al l be veri fi ed by vi su al i nspecti on. Case C1 ) su ppl i ed ful l y assem bl ed an d n ot d i sm antl ed for shi pm ent. Case C2) su ppl i ed d i sm an tl ed for sh i pm en t, wh ere th e con ti n u i ty of protecti ve con d u ctors i s ensu red after d i sm antl i ng , tran sportati on an d reassem bl y (for exam pl e by th e u se of pl u g/socket com bi nati on (s)). I n case C2), the i nstal l ati on d ocu m en ts (see 1 7. 2) sh al l req u i re th at al l conn ecti ons of th e protective con d u ctor(s) th at were d i scon n ected for shi pmen t are veri fi ed , for exam pl e by vi su al i n specti on. BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 – 97 – Table 1 0 – Examples of maximum cable lengths from protective devices to their loads for TN-systems 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Maximum Maximum Minimum Fuse Fuse Miniature Miniature Miniature Adjustasource nominal crossdiscon- discon- circuit- circuit- circuitble impedance of sectional area rating or nect time nect time breaker breaker breaker circuitthe supply to setting of the char.C 5s 0,4 s char.B char.D breaker the protective Ia = 5 × IN Ia = 1 0 × Ia = 20 × Ia = 8 × protective device IN IN IN device IN A Maximum cable length in m from mm2 mΩ each protective device to its load 500 1 ,5 16 97 53 76 30 7 31 500 2, 5 20 115 57 94 34 3 36 500 4, 0 25 1 35 66 114 35 38 400 6, 0 32 1 45 59 1 33 40 42 300 10 50 1 25 41 1 32 33 37 73 1 79 55 200 16 63 1 75 200 25 (l i n e)/1 6 (PE) 80 1 33 38 61 1 00 35 (l i n e)/1 6 (PE) 1 00 1 36 73 1 00 50 (l i n e)/25 (PE) 1 25 1 41 66 1 00 70 (l i n e)/35 (PE) 1 60 1 38 46 50 95 (l i n e)/50 (PE) 200 1 52 98 50 1 20 (l i n e)/70 (PE) 250 1 57 79 Th e val u es of th e m axi m u m cabl e l en g th i n Tabl e 1 0 are based on th e fol l owi n g assu mpti on s: • PVC cabl e wi th copper cond u ctors, cond u ctor tem peratu re u n d er sh ort-ci rcu i t cond i ti on s 1 60 ° C (see Tabl e D. 5); • cabl es wi th l i ne con d u ctors u p to 1 6 m m 2 provi d e a protecti ve con d u ctor of eq u al cross secti on al area to th at of th e l i ne con d u ctors; • • • • cabl es above 1 6 m m 2 provi d e a red u ced si ze protecti ve con d u ctor as sh own ; 3-ph ase system , n omi nal vol tag e of th e power su ppl y 400 V ( U0 = 230 V); col u m n 3 val u es are correl ated wi th Tabl e 6 (see 1 2. 4). d iscon n ecti on ti m e for ci rcu i t-breakers i s http://www.china-gauges.com/ ≤ 0, 4 s (col u mn s 6 – 9) A d evi ati on from th ese assu mpti on s can req u i re a com pl ete cal cu l ation or m easu rem en t of th e fau l t l oop i m ped ance. Fu rth er i n formati on i s avai l abl e from I EC 60228 an d I EC TR 61 200-53. 1 8.3 Insulation resistance tests When insu lation resistance tests are performed , the insu lation resistance measu red at 500 V DC between the power circuit cond uctors and the protective bonding circu it shall be not less than 1 M Ω . The test may be mad e on ind ividu al sections of the complete el ectrical installation . Exception: for certain parts of electrical equipmen t, incorporating for example busbars, conductor wire or con ductor bar systems or sl ip-rin g assembl ies, a lower min imum valu e is permitted , bu t that valu e shal l n ot be l ess than 50 k Ω . I f the electrical equipmen t of the machin e con tains surge protection devices which are l ikely to operate d urin g the test, it is permitted to either: BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 98 – – – I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 disconnect these d evices, or reduce the test vol tage to a value lower than the voltage protection level of the surge protection devices, bu t n ot lower than the peak val ue of the upper l imit of the supply (phase to n eu tral) voltage. 1 8.4 Voltage tests When voltage tests are performed, tests and test equipment shall be in accordance with EN 61 1 80. The test vol tage shall be at a nominal frequency of 50 H z or 60 H z. The maximu m test voltage shal l have a valu e of twice the rated su pply vol tage of the equ ipmen t or 1 000 V, whichever is the greater. The maximu m test voltage shal l be applied between the power circuit con ductors and the protective bond ing circu it for at l east 1 s. The requ iremen ts are satisfied if no d isru ptive d ischarge occurs. Componen ts and devices that are not rated to withstand the test voltage and surge protection devices which are l ikely to operate du ring the test shal l be d isconnected du ring testin g. Componen ts and devices that have been vol tage tested in accord ance with their prod uct standards may be d isconn ected during testing. 1 8.5 Protection against residual voltages Where appropriate, tests shal l be performed to ensure compliance with 6. 2. 4. 1 8.6 Functional tests The fu nctions of el ectrical equ ipment shall be tested . 1 8.7 Retesting Where a portion of the machine or its associated equipmen t is changed or modified , the need for re-verification an d testing of the electrical equ ipmen t shall be considered . Particu lar atten tion shoul d be given to the possibl e adverse effects that retestin g can have on the eq uipmen t (for example overstressing of insu lation , disconnection /reconnection of devices). http://www.china-gauges.com/ BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 – 99 – Annex A (normative) Fault protection by automatic disconnection of supply A.1 Fault protection for machines supplied from TN-systems A.1 .1 General The provisions in the Ann ex A are derived from I EC 60364-4-41 : 2005, and I EC 60364-6: 2006. Fau lt protection shall be provid ed by an overcu rrent protective device that automatically d isconnects the su pply to the circu it or equ ipmen t in the event of a fau lt between a l ive part and an exposed conductive part or a protective conductor in the circu it or equipmen t, within a sufficiently short d isconn ecting time. A disconnectin g time n ot exceed in g 5 s is considered sufficiently short for machin es that are neither hand-hel d nor portable. Where this d isconnecting time cannot be assured , su pplemen tary protective bond ing shal l be provided in accordance with A. 1 . 3 that can preven t a prospective touch voltage from exceed ing 50 V AC or 1 20 V ripple-free DC between simu ltaneousl y accessible con ductive parts. N OTE Th e u se of su ppl em entary protecti ve bon d i n g d oes not precl u d e th e n eed to d i scon n ect th e su ppl y for oth er reasons, for exam pl e protecti on ag ai nst fi re, th erm al stresses i n eq u i pm ent, etc. For circu its which su pply, through socket-ou tl ets or directl y withou t socket-ou tlets, Class 1 hand-held eq uipmen t or portabl e eq uipmen t (for example socket-outl ets on a machin e for accessory eq uipmen t, see 1 5. 1 ) Table A. 1 specifies the maximum d isconnectin g times that are considered su fficien tly short. Table A.1 – Maximum disconnecting times for TN systems System 50 V < U0 ≤ 1 20 V 1 20 V < s TN 230 V < s U0 ≤ 400 V U0 > 400 V s s AC DC AC DC AC DC AC DC 0, 8 N OTE 1 0, 4 5 0, 2 0, 4 0, 1 0, 1 Uo i s th e n omi nal AC or DC l i ne to earth vol tag e. N OTE 1 U0 ≤ 230 V http://www.china-gauges.com/ Di scon n ecti on m ay be req u i red for reason s oth er than protecti on ag ai nst el ectri c sh ock. N OTE 2 For vol tag es wh i ch are wi th i n the tol eran ce ban d stated i n I EC 60038, th e d i scon n ecti n g ti m e appropri ate to th e n om i n al vol tag e appl i es. N OTE 3 For i n term ed i ate val u es of vol tage, th e n ext h i g h er val u e i n th e above tabl e i s to be u sed . A.1 .2 Conditions for protection by automatic disconnection of the supply by overcurrent protective devices The characteristics of overcurrent protective devices an d the circu it impedances shall be such that, if a faul t of n egligibl e impedance occurs anywhere in the electrical equ ipment between a l ine cond uctor an d a protective con ductor or exposed conductive part, au tomatic d isconnection of the supply wil l occur within the specified time (i. e. ≤ 5 s or ≤ values in accord ance with Table A. 1 ). The following gen eral con dition fu lfils this req uiremen t: BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 1 00 – I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 Zs × Ia ≤ U0 where Zs is the impedance of the fault l oop comprising the source, the l ive cond uctor u p to the poin t of the fault an d the protective conductor between the poin t of the fau l t and the sou rce; Ia is the curren t causing the au tomatic operation of the disconnectin g protective device within the specified time; Uo is the nominal AC vol tage to earth. The increase of the resistance of the conductors with the increase of temperature du e to the faul t curren t shall be taken into accoun t in the fol lowin g equation : 2 U0 3 Ia Zs ≤ × (n) wh ere Zs (n ) is the measu red or calcu lated valu e of Zs un der n ormal operatin g con ditions. Where the valu e of the faul t loop impedance exceeds 2 U0 /3 Ia , a more precise assessmen t can be made in accordance with the procedure described in C. 61 . 3. 6. 2 of I EC 60364-6: 2006. A.1 .3 Condition for protection by reducing the touch voltage below 50 V Where the requ irements of A. 1 . 2 can not be assu red , suppl ementary protective bonding can be selected as the means of ensurin g that touch vol tages wil l not exceed 50 V. This is achieved when the imped ance of the protective bonding circuit ( ZPE ) does n ot exceed : 50 × ZS ZPE ≤ U 0 where ZPE is the imped ance of the protective bon ding circu it between the equ ipment an ywhere in the instal lation and the PE terminal of the machin e (see 5. 2 and Figure 4) or between simu l taneously accessible exposed conductive parts and /or extraneous-conductiveparts. Confirmation of this con dition can be achieved by usin g the method of Test 1 of 1 8. 2. 2 to measure the resistance R PE . The cond ition for protection is achieved when the measured valu e of R PE does n ot exceed: http://www.china-gauges.com/ RPE ≤ 50 Ia(5s) wh ere Ia(5s) is the 5 s operating current of the protective device; R PE is the resistance of the protective bond in g circu it between the PE terminal (see 5. 2 and Figure 4) an d the equipment an ywhere on the machine, or between simul taneousl y accessible exposed conductive parts an d/or extraneous-con ductiveparts. N OTE 1 Su ppl em en tary protecti ve bon d i n g i s con si d ered as an ad d i ti on to fau l t protecti on . N OTE 2 Su ppl em en tary protecti ve bond i n g m ay i n vol ve the en ti re i nstal l ati on, a part of th e i nstal l ati on , an i tem of apparatu s, or a l ocati on. BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 – 1 01 – A.1 .4 Verification of conditions for protection by automatic disconnection of the supply A.1 .4.1 General The effectiveness of the measures for faul t protection by automatic disconnection of suppl y in accord ance with A. 1 . 2 is verified as follows: – – verification of the characteristics of the associated protective device by visual inspection of the n ominal cu rrent setting for circu it-breakers and the curren t ratin g for fuses, an d ; measurement of the fault loop impedance ( Zs ). See Figure A. 1 . Exception : Verification of the contin uity of the protective conductors may replace the measuremen t where the calcu lations of the faul t l oop impedance are avail able and when the arran gemen t of the installations permits the verification of the l ength and cross-section al area of the conductors. Where a power drive system (PDS) is used , the discon nection time for faul t protection shall meet the relevan t requ iremen ts of this Annex A at the incoming suppl y terminals of the basic d rive modu le (BDM ) of the PDS. See Figure A. 2. A.1 .4.2 Measurement of the fault loop impedance Where measu remen t of the fau lt l oop imped ance is performed , it is recommen ded that the measuring eq uipmen t compl y with I EC 61 557-3. The in formation abou t the accuracy of the measuring resul ts, and the procedures to be fol lowed given in the documen tation of the measuring eq uipmen t shal l be considered . M easurement shall be performed when the machine is con nected to a supply having the same frequ ency as the nominal frequency of the su pply at the in tended installation . N OTE Fi g u re A. 1 i l l u strates a typi cal arran gem en t for measu ri n g th e fau l t l oop i m ped an ce on a m ach i n e. I f it is not practicable for the motor to be con nected during the test, the two line con ductors n ot used in the test may be opened , for example, by removing fuses. The measured value of the fau lt loop impedance shall be in accordance with A. 1 . 2. http://www.china-gauges.com/ BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 1 02 – I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 Machine M 3~ PE Fault loop impedance tester in accordance with IEC 61 557-3 Power supply L1 L2 Zs L3 PE To other circuits of the electrical equipment IEC Figure A.1 – Typical arrangement for fault loop impedance ( Zs ) measurement in TN systems Machine Power Drive System BDM M 3~ PE http://www.china-gauges.com/ Fault loop Power supply Zs L1 L2 impedance tester in accordance with IEC 61 557-3 L3 PE To other circuits of the electrical equipment Figure A.2 – Typical arrangement for fault loop impedance ( Zs ) measurement for power drive system circuits in TN systems IEC BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 A.2 – 1 03 – Fault protection for machines supplied from TT-systems A.2.1 Connection to earth Al l exposed-cond uctive-parts an d al l extraneous-conductive-parts shal l be bonded to the protective bonding circuit. Exception: see 8. 2. 5. I n add ition to the requ irements of 5. 2, provision for additional earthin g of machin e elemen ts and /or the PE con ductor of the electrical equ ipmen t may be provided . N OTE I n a TT system , th e n eu tral poi nt or the m i d -poi nt of th e power su ppl y system i s earth ed , or wh ere a n eu tral poi nt or mi d -poi n t i s n ot avai l abl e or n ot accessi bl e, a l i n e con d u ctor i s earth ed (d eri ved from I EC 60364-441 : 2005, 41 1 . 5. 1 ). A.2.2 Fault protection for TT systems A.2.2.1 General Generally in TT systems, RCDs shall be used for fault protection . Alternativel y, overcurren t protective devices may be used for faul t protection provided a suitably low value of Zs is permanen tl y and rel iably assured . Zs is the imped ance of the fault loop. N OTE I n some cou ntri es the u se of overcu rren t protecti ve d evi ces i s n ot permi tted as th e m eans of fau l t protecti on i n TT systems. Where au tomatic discon nection of supply is used as a measure for fau lt protection , the electrical equipmen t design er may either: a) use in the d esign calculations a valu e of earth el ectrode resistance or earth fau l t l oop imped ance measured in accord ance with I EC 60364-6 or d eclared by the in tend ed user of the eq uipmen t (see Annex B); or b) for series-manufactured machines, specify a valu e of the earth electrode resistance or earth fau lt l oop impedance suitable for the in tended installations; and shall state in the instal lation instructions the valu e of earth electrode resistance or earth fault loop impedance used for the design of the electrical equ ipmen t, specifying that this is the maximu m value to which the machine can be conn ected . Where a power drive system (PDS) is used , the d iscon nection time for fault protection shall http://www.china-gauges.com/ meet the relevan t req uirements of this Annex A at the incoming su ppl y terminals of the basic d rive modu le (BDM ) of the PDS. See Figure A. 4. A.2.2.2 Protection by residual current protective device (RCD) Where a residu al cu rren t protective device (RCD) is used for fau lt protection , the fol lowing cond itions shal l be ful filled: a) d isconnection time as req uired by Table A. 2, an d b) R A × I∆ n ≤ 50 V where: RA I∆ n is the sum of the resistances of the earth electrode an d the protective con ductor for each exposed cond uctive-part, is the rated resid ual operatin g curren t of the RCD. Exception: a d isconn ection time not exceed ing 1 s is permitted for d istribution circuits and for circu its n ot covered by Tabl e A. 2. BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 1 04 – N OTE 1 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 Fau l t protecti on i s provi d ed i n thi s case al so i f th e fau l t i m ped ance i s not n eg l i gi bl e. N OTE 2 Wh ere d i scri m i n ati on between RCDs i s n ecessary, i n formati on i s gi ven i n 535. 3 of I EC 60364-5-53: 2001 . N OTE 3 Th e d i scon n ecti on ti m es i n accord an ce wi th Tabl e A. 2 rel ate to prospecti ve resi d u al fau l t cu rren ts si g n i fi can tl y h i gh er th an th e rated resi d u al operati n g cu rren t of th e RCD (typi cal l y 5 I∆ n ). N OTE 4 Th e d efi ni ti on of R A is extracted from I EC 60364-4-41 . I n th i s part of I EC 60204, th e term “earth el ectrod e” i n the d efi ni ti on of R A i s consi d ered to m ean th e “earth -retu rn path ” as d efi n ed by I EC 60050-1 95: 1 998, 1 95-02-30. A.2.2.3 Protection by overcurrent protective devices Where an overcurren t protective device is used the followin g cond ition shall be ful fill ed : Zs × Ia ≤ Uo where: Zs is the impedance of the fault loop comprising : the sou rce, the lin e conductor up to the point of the fau lt, the protective cond uctor of each exposed-cond uctive-part, the earthing conductor, the earth electrode of the instal lation and the earth el ectrode of the source; Ia is the current causing the au tomatic operation of the d iscon nectin g device within the time specified in Table A. 2. Exception : a d isconnection time n ot exceeding 1 s is permitted for circuits not covered by Table A. 2. Uo is the nominal AC or DC l ine to earth vol tage. The maximum d isconnection times stated in Table A. 2 shal l be appl ied to circuits n ot exceed in g 32 A. Maximu m d isconnection times shall n ot exceed 1 s for circuits 32 A or greater. Table A.2 – Maximum disconnecting time for TT-systems System 50 V < Uo ≤ 1 20 V 1 20 V < s TT Uo ≤ 230 V 230 V < s Uo ≤ 400 V s Uo > 400 V s http://www.china-gauges.com/ AC DC AC DC AC DC AC DC 0, 3 N OTE 0, 2 0, 4 0, 07 0, 2 0, 04 0, 1 Wh ere i n TT system s th e d i scon n ecti on i s achi eved by an overcu rren t protecti ve d evi ce an d al l extran eou scon d u cti ve-parts wi l l be conn ected to th e protecti ve bon d i n g ci rcu i t, th e m axi m u m d i scon n ecti on ti m es speci fi ed i n Tabl e A. 1 may be u sed . Uo i s th e n omi nal AC or DC l i ne to earth vol tag e. N OTE Di sconn ecti on can be req u i red for reasons oth er th an protecti on ag ai n st el ectri c sh ock. A.2.3 Verification of protection by automatic disconnection of supply using a residual current protective device Fau l t protection in a TT system by au tomatic d isconnection of suppl y using a residual curren t protective device shall be verified by the following: • inspection of the rated resid ual curren t for tripping value, and the d isconn ecting time valu e of the resid ual curren t protective device, and BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 – 1 05 – • verification that the resid ual curren t protective device has been tested in accordance with a relevant I EC standard , and • inspection of the con nections to the residu al cu rren t protective device and protective bond in g circu it. A.2.4 Measurement of the fault loop impedance ( Zs ) Where measu remen t of the fau lt loop impedance is performed the measuring equ ipmen t shou ld comply with I EC 61 557-3. The information about the accuracy of the measurin g resul ts, and the procedu res to be fol lowed given in the documen tation of the measuring equ ipmen t shal l be consid ered . The measuremen t shal l be performed with the electrical eq uipmen t connected to a su pply of between 99 % and 1 01 % the nominal frequ ency of the supply at the in ten ded instal lation. N OTE 1 Fi g u re A. 3 i l l u strates a typi cal arran g em en t for m easu ri n g th e fau l t l oop i m ped an ce on a m ach i n e. I f it is not practicable for the motor to be con nected during the test, the two line con ductors n ot used in the test may be opened , for example, by removing fuses. N OTE 2 Fi g u re A. 4 i l l u strates a typi cal arran g em en t for measu ri n g th e fau l t l oop i m ped an ce wh en a power d ri ve system i s u sed . The measured value of the fau lt loop impedance shall be in accordance with A. 2. 2. 3. N OTE 3 I n formati on on th e veri fi cati on of performan ce of a resi d u al cu rrent protecti ve d evi ce an d m easu rem en t of earth fau l t l oop i m ped ance can be fou n d i n I EC 60364-6. Machine M 3~ PE Fault loop impedance tester in accordance with IEC 61 557-3 Power supply L1 L2 Zs http://www.china-gauges.com/ L3 PE PE To other circuits of the electrical equipment Figure A.3 – Typical arrangement for fault loop impedance ( Zs ) measurement in TT systems IEC BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 1 06 – I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 Machine Power Drive System BDM M 3~ PE Power supply Zs L1 L2 Fault loop impedance tester in accordance with IEC 61 557-3 L3 PE To other circuits of the electrical equipment Figure A.4 – Typical arrangement for fault loop impedance ( Zs ) measurement for power drive system circuits in TT systems IEC http://www.china-gauges.com/ BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 – 1 07 – Annex B (informative) Enquiry form for the electrical equipment of machines The use of this enqu iry form can facilitate an exchange of in formation between the user and supplier on basic conditions and add itional user req uirements to en able suitable design, application and util ization of the electrical eq uipmen t of the machine (see 4. 1 ) particu larl y when the con ditions on site can deviate from those gen erall y expected. Annex B can also serve as an in ternal checkl ist for serial man ufactu red machin es. N am e of m anu factu rer/su ppl i er N am e of en d u ser Ten d er/ord er nu m ber Type of m ach i n e Date Type d esi g n ati on Seri al n u m ber 1. Special conditions (see Clause 1 ) a) I s th e mach i n e to be u sed i n the open ai r? Yes/N o I f yes, speci fi cati on b) Wi l l the m achi ne u se, process or prod u ce expl osi ve or fl am m abl e material ? Yes/N o I f yes, speci fi cati on c) I s th e mach i n e for u se i n poten ti al l y expl osi ve or fl amm abl e atmosph eres? Yes/N o I f yes, speci fi cati on d) Can th e m achi n e presen t speci al h azard s when prod u ci n g or con su mi n g certai n m ateri al s? Yes/N o I f yes, speci fi cati on e) I s th e mach i ne for u se i n m i nes? Yes/N o I f yes, specifi cati on 2. El ectrical supplies and related conditions (see 4.3) a) An ti ci pated vol tag e fl u ctu ati ons (i f m ore th an ± 1 0 %) b) An ti ci pated freq u en cy fl u ctu ati ons (i f m ore than ± 2 %) Con ti n u ou s Sh ort ti m e c) I n d i cate possi bl e fu tu re chan ges i n el ectrical eq u i pm en t th at wi l l req u i re an i n crease i n th e el ectri cal su ppl y req u i rem en ts d) Speci fy vol tag e i n terru pti ons i n su ppl y i f l on ger th an speci fi ed i n Cl au se 4 where el ectri cal eq u i pm en t h as to m ai n tai n operati on u n d er su ch con d i ti ons 3. Ph ysi cal en vironment and operating conditi ons (see 4. 4) a) El ectrom ag n eti c en vi ron m en t (see 4. 4. 2) Speci al EM C con d i ti on s or req u i rem en ts b) Am bi en t tem peratu re ran ge c) H u m i d i ty ran g e d) Al ti tu d e e) Speci al en vi ron m en tal con d i ti on s (for exam pl e corrosi ve atm osph eres, d u st, wet en vi ron m en ts) f) Rad i ati on g) Vi brati on , sh ock http://www.china-gauges.com/ Resi d en ti al , com merci al or l ig h t i n d u stri al en vi ron men t I n d u stri al en vi ron men t BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 1 08 – h) Speci al i nstal l ati on an d operati on req u i rem ents (for exam pl e fl am e-retard an t cabl es and con d u ctors) i) Tran sportati on an d storag e (for exam pl e, tem peratu res ou tsi d e th e ran ge speci fi ed i n 4. 5) k) restri cti on s rel ated to si ze, wei g h t or poi n t l oad 4. Incoming electrical supplies I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 Speci fy for each sou rce of su ppl y: a) N om i nal vol tage (V) AC DC I f AC, n u m ber of ph ases Freq u en cy (H z) TN (system wi th on e poi n t d i rectl y earth ed , wi th a protecti ve con d u ctor (PE) d i rectl y con n ected to that poi nt); speci fy i f th e earth ed poi n t i s th e n eu tral poi nt (cen tre of th e star) or an oth er poi n t TT (system wi th on e poi n t d i rectl y earth ed bu t th e protecti ve con d u ctor (PE) of th e m achi n e n ot con n ected to that earth poi nt of th e system ) Val u e of th e su ppl y sou rce i mped ance ( Ω ) at th e poi n t of con n ecti on to th e el ectrical eq u i pm en t Prospecti ve sh ort-ci rcu i t cu rren t (kA r. m . s. ) at th e poi n t of con n ecti on to th e el ectri cal eq u i pm en t (see al so i tem 2) b) Type of d i stri bu ti on system (see I EC 60364-1 ) I T (system th at i s n ot d i rectl y earth ed ) I n th e case of I T system s, i s i n su l ati on m oni tori n g /fau l t l ocati on to be provi d ed by th e su ppl i er of th e el ectri cal eq u i pm en t? Yes No c) Yes No I s d iscon n ecti on of th e neu tral (N ) con d u ctor req u i red ? Yes No I s a rem ovabl e l in k for d i scon necti n g th e n eu tral (N ) req u i red ? Yes I s th e el ectri cal eq u i pm ent to be con n ected to a n eu tral (N ) su ppl y con d u ctor? (See 5. 1 ) M axi m u m cu rren t (A) al l owed d) Su ppl y d i scon necti n g d evi ce No http://www.china-gauges.com/ Type of su ppl y d i scon n ecti n g d evi ce to be provi d ed e) Cross secti on al area and m ateri al of extern al protecti ve (PE) cond u ctor f) I s an RCD provi d ed i n th e i n stal l ati on ? 5. Protection against electric shock (see Clause 6) a) b) Yes/N o I f yes, type an d rated resi d u al operati n g cu rren t For wh i ch of the fol l owi n g cl asses of persons i s access to th e i n teri or of encl osu res req u i red d u ri n g n ormal operati on of th e eq u i pm en t? El ectri cal l y ski l l ed persons El ectri cal l y i nstructed person s Are l ocks wi th rem ovabl e keys to be provi d ed for secu ri n g the d oors? (see 6. 2. 2) Yes No Type of l ocki n g d evi ce Basi c l ock u ni t (except key cyl i n d er) to be su ppl i ed an d i nstal l ed by Key cyl i n d er to be su ppl i ed an d i nstal l ed by BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 – 1 09 – 6. Protection of equipment (see Clause 7) a) Wi l l the u ser or th e su ppl i er of th e el ectri cal eq u i pm en t provi d e su ppl y cond u ctors an d th e overcu rren t protecti on for th e su ppl y con d u ctors? (see 7. 2. 2) Type an d rati n g of overcu rrent protecti ve d evi ces b) Larg est (kW) three-ph ase AC m otor th at m ay be started d i rect-on -l i n e c) M ay th e n u m ber of m otor overl oad d etecti on d evi ces be red u ced ? (see 7. 3. 2) Yes No d) I s overvol tage protecti on to be provi d ed ? Yes/N o I f yes, specifi cati on Start Stop 7. Operation For cabl el ess con trol system s, speci fy th e ti me d el ay before au tom ati c m achi n e sh u td own i s i n i ti ated i n the absen ce of a val i d si g n al . 8. Operator interface and machine-mounted control devices (see Clause 1 0) Speci al col ou r preferences (for exam pl e to al i g n wi th exi sti ng m achi nery): Oth er 9. Controlgear Deg ree of protecti on of en cl osu res (see 1 1 . 3) or speci al con d i ti ons: 1 0. Wiring practices (see Clause 1 3) I s th ere a speci fi c m eth od of i d en ti fi cati on to be u sed for th e con d u ctors? (see 1 3. 2. 1 ) Yes No Yes No Type 1 1 . Accessories and lighting (see Clause 1 5) a) I s a parti cu l ar type of socket-ou tl et req u i red ? I f yes, wh i ch type? b) Wh ere th e m ach i n e i s eq u i pped wi th l ocal l i ghti n g: H i g h est permi ssi bl e vol tag e (V) I f l i gh ti n g ci rcu i t vol tag e i s n ot obtai n ed d i rectl y from the power su ppl y, state http://www.china-gauges.com/ preferred vol tag e 1 2. Marking, warnings and reference designations (see Clause 1 6) a) Fu n cti on al i d enti fi cati on (see 1 6. 3) Speci fi cati ons: b) I n scri pti ons/speci al m arki n gs On el ectri cal eq u i pm en t? I n wh i ch l an g u ag e? c) Speci fi c l ocal reg u l ati on s th at m u st be com pl i ed wi th Yes No On wh at m ed i a/ I n wh i ch l an g u ag e? I f yes, wh i ch on e? 1 3. Technical documentation (see Clause 1 7) a) Tech n i cal d ocu m en tati on (see 1 7. 1 ) Fi l e format? b) I n stru cti on s for u se (see 1 7. 1 ) On wh at m ed i a? Fi l e format? I n wh i ch l an g u ag e? BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 110 – I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 c) Si ze, l ocati on an d pu rpose of d u cts, open cabl e trays or cabl e su pports to be provi d ed by th e u ser d) I n d i cate i f speci al l i m i tati ons on th e si ze or wei g ht affect th e tran sport of a parti cu l ar m ach i n e or con trol gear assem bl i es to th e i n stal l ati on si te: M axi m u m d i m en si ons M axi m u m wei gh t e) I n th e case of speci al l y bu il t machi n es, i s a certi fi cate of operati ng tests wi th th e l oad ed m achi n e to be su ppl i ed ? Yes No f) I n th e case of oth er m achi n es, i s a certi fi cate of operati n g type tests on a l oad ed prototype m achi n e to be su ppl i ed ? Yes No http://www.china-gauges.com/ BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 – 111 – Annex C (informative) Examples of machines covered by this part of IEC 60204 The foll owing l ist shows exampl es of machines whose electrical eq uipmen t shou ld con form to this part of I EC 60204. The list is not in ten ded to be exhaustive bu t is consisten t with the d efinition of machin ery (3. 1 . 40). This part of I EC 60204 need n ot be appl ied to machin es that are household and similar domestic appliances within the scope of the I EC 60335 series of standards. M etalworking machinery Food machin ery • metal cutting machines • d ough breaks • metal forming machines • mixin g machines • pie and tart machin es • meat processing machines Pl astics and rubber machin ery Printing, paper an d board machinery • in jection mou ld in g machin es • prin ting machines • extrusion machines • fin ishing machines, gu illotin es, folders • blow moul din g machines • reeling and slittin g machines • thermoset moul ding machin es • fold er box glu in g machines • size reduction machines • paper and board making machin es Wood machin ery I nspecting/testin g machin ery • woodworking machines • co-ordin ate measuring machin es • l aminating machin es • in-process gauging machin es • sawmil l machin es Assembly machines Compressors M aterial hand l ing machines Packaging machin ery http://www.china-gauges.com/ • robots • palletizers/depalletizers • con veyors • • transfer machin es wrappin g machin es • storage an d retrieval machin es an d shrink-wrapping Textile machin es Laundry machines Refrigeration and air-conditioning machines H eating and ventilatin g machin es BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 112 – Leather/imitation leather footwear machin ery goods and Construction machin ery I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 and bu ild ing • cu ttin g an d punchin g machines • tu nnelling machines • roughing, scouring, bu ffin g, trimming an d brushing machines • concrete batchin g machin es footwear mou ldin g machin es • • brick-making machines l asting machines • • stone, ceramic machin es H oisting machin ery (see I EC 60204-32) and gl ass-making Transportable machinery • cranes • wood working machines • hoists • metal working machines M achinery for transportation of persons M obile machinery • escal ators • liftin g platforms • ropeways for transportation of persons, for example chairlifts, ski l ifts • fork l ift trucks passen ger l ifts • • construction machin es Power-operated d oors M achin es for hot metal processing Leisure machinery Tanning machin ery • fairgrou nd an d amusemen t rides Pu mps materials • mu lti-roll er machin es • bandknife machines • hydraul ic tan ning machin es M ining and q uarrying machines Agricu lture an d forestry machin es http://www.china-gauges.com/ BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 – 113 – Annex D (informative) Current-carrying capacity and overcurrent protection of conductors and cables in the electrical equipment of machines D.1 General The pu rpose of this Annex A is to provid e additional in formation on the selection of conductor sizes where the cond itions given for Table 6 (see Cl ause 1 2) have to be modified (see n otes to Tabl e 6). D.2 General operating conditions D.2.1 Ambient air temperature The curren t carrying capacity for PVC insul ated conductors given in Table 6 is rel ated to an ambient air temperature of + 40 °C. For other ambien t air temperatures, the correction factors are given in Table D. 1 . The correction factors for rubber insul ated cables are given by the manu facturer. Table D.1 – Correction factors Ambient air temperature Correction factor °C 40 1 , 00 45 0, 91 50 0, 82 55 0, 71 60 0, 58 N OTE Th e correcti on factors are d eri ved from I EC 60364-5-52. Th e m axi m u m tem peratu re u nd er n ormal con d i ti ons for PVC 70 ° C. http://www.china-gauges.com/ D.2.2 Methods of installation I n machin es, the methods of cond uctor and cable instal lation between enclosures an d ind ividu al items of the equ ipment shown in Figu re D. 1 are assumed to be typical (the letters used are in accord ance with I EC 60364-5-52): – – – – M ethod B1 : usin g con duits (3. 1 . 9) and cable trunkin g systems (3. 1 . 6) for hold in g an d protectin g conductors or single core cabl es; M ethod B2: same as B1 bu t used for mu l ticore cables; M ethod C: mul ticore cables instal led in free air, horizon tal or vertical withou t gap between cabl es on walls; M ethod E: mul ticore cables in free air, horizon tal or vertical l aid on open cable trays (3. 1 . 5). BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 114 – I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 B1 IEC a) Con ductors/si n gl e core cabl es i n con dui t an d cabl e tru n ki n g systems B2 IEC b) Cabl es i n condu i t an d cabl e trun ki ng systems C IEC c) Cabl es on wal l s ≥ 0, 3 D e http://www.china-gauges.com/ E ≥ 0, 3 D e IEC d) Cabl es on open cabl e trays Figu re D.1 – Methods of conductor and cable installation independent of nu mber of conductors/cables BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 D.2.3 – 115 – Grouping Where more l oaded cond uctors in cabl es or cond uctor pairs are instal led, d erate the valu es of given in Table 6 or by the manu facturer in accordance with Tabl es D. 2 or D. 3. Iz , N OTE Ci rcu i ts wi th Ib < 30 % of Iz n eed n ot be d erated . Table D.2 – Derating factors for Iz for grouping M ethods of i nstal l ati on (see Fi g u re D. 1 ) (see N ote 3) N u mber of l oaded ci rcui ts/cabl es 2 4 6 9 B1 (con d u ctors or si n g l e core cabl es) an d B2 (m u l ti core cabl es) 0, 80 0, 65 0, 57 0, 50 C si n g l e l ayer wi th n o gap between cabl es 0, 85 0, 75 0, 72 0, 70 E si n g l e l ayer on on e perforated tray wi th ou t g ap between cabl es 0, 88 0, 77 0, 73 0, 72 E as before bu t wi th 2 to 3 trays, wi th a verti cal spaci n g between each tray of 300 m m (see N ote 4) 0, 86 0, 76 0, 71 0, 66 0, 76 0, 57 0, 48 0, 40 Con trol ci rcu i t pai rs < 0, 5mm 2 i n d epen d en t of m eth od s of i nstal l ati on N OTE 1 Th ese factors are appl i cabl e to – cabl es, al l eq u al l y l oad ed , th e ci rcu i t i tsel f sym m etri cal l y l oad ed ; – g rou ps of ci rcu i ts of i nsu l ated con d u ctors or cabl es h avi n g the sam e al l owabl e maxi m u m operati ng tem peratu re. N OTE 2 Th e sam e factors are appl i ed to – g rou ps of two or th ree si n gl e-core cabl es; – m u l ti core cabl es. N OTE 3 Factors d eri ved from I EC 60364-5-52: 2009. N OTE 4 A perforated cabl e tray i s a tray where th e hol es occu py m ore th an 30 % of th e area of th e base. (Deri ved from I EC 60364-5-52: 2009). Table D.3 – Derating factors for Iz for mu lticore cables up to 1 0 mm 2 N u mber of l oaded con du ctors or pai rs Con ductors ( ≥ 1 mm 2 ) (see N ote 3) Pai rs (0, 25 mm 2 to 0, 75 mm 2 ) 1 – 1 ,0 3 1 ,0 5 0, 75 0, 39 7 0, 65 0, 34 N OTE 1 http://www.china-gauges.com/ 0, 5 10 0, 55 0, 29 24 0, 40 0, 21 Appl i cabl e to m u l ti core cabl es wi th eq u al l y l oad ed cond u ctors/pai rs. N OTE 2 For grou pi ng of m u l ti core cabl es, see d erati n g factors of Tabl e D. 2. N OTE 3 Factors d eri ved from I EC 60364-5-52: 2009. BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 116 – D.2.4 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 Classification of condu ctors Table D.4 – Classification of condu ctors Cl ass Descri pti on U se/appl i cati on 1 Sol i d copper or al u m i n i u m cond u ctors 2 Stran d ed copper or al u mi ni u m cond u ctors 5 Fl exi bl e stran d ed copper cond u ctors 6 Fl exi bl e stran d ed copper cond u ctors con d u ctors th at are m ore fl exi bl e than cl ass 5 Fi xed i n stal l ati on s M achi n e i n stal l ati on s wi th presence of vi brati on ; con n ecti on to m ovi n g parts For freq u ent movem en ts N OTE Deri ved from I EC 60228. D.3 Co-ordination between conductors and protective devices providing overload protection Figure D. 2 illustrates the relationship between the parameters of conductors and the parameters of protective d evices provid ing overload protection . Desi g n cu rren t Ib Cu rren t carryi n g capaci ty Iz 1 , 45 × Iz Param eters of con d u ctors IA Acceptabl e ran g e for tri ppi n g cu rrent I2 Param eters of protecti ve d evi ces N om i nal cu rrent or cu rren t setti n g In IEC Figure D.2 – Parameters of conductors and protective devices http://www.china-gauges.com/ Correct protection of a cabl e req u ires that the operating characteristics of a protective device (for example overcurren t protective d evice, motor overl oad protective device) protecting the cabl e against overload satisfy the two fol lowing conditions: Ib I2 ≤ In ≤ Iz ≤ 1 , 45 × Iz where Ib is the current for which the circuit is d esigned ; IZ is the effective curren t-carrying capacity, in amperes, of the cabl e for con tinuous service accord in g to Table 6 for the particul ar instal lation conditions: – temperature, d eratin g of IZ see Table D. 1 ; – grouping, derating of IZ see Table D. 2; – mu l ticore cables, derating of IZ see Tabl e D. 3. BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 In is the nominal cu rren t of the protective device; N OTE 1 I2 – 117 – For ad j u stabl e protecti ve d evi ces, th e n omi n al cu rren t In i s th e cu rren t setti n g sel ected . is the min imum current ensuring effective operation of the protective device within a specified time (for exampl e 1 h for protective devices up to 63 A). The curren t I2 ensu ring effective operation of the protective device is given in the product standard or may be provided by the man u facturer. N OTE 2 For m otor ci rcu i t con d u ctors, overl oad protecti on for con d u ctor(s) can be provi d ed by th e overl oad protecti on for th e m otor(s) whereas th e sh ort-ci rcu i t protecti on i s provi d ed by sh ort-ci rcu i t protecti ve d evi ces. Wh ere a d evi ce th at provi d es both overl oad an d sh ort-ci rcu i t protecti on i s u sed i n accordan ce wi th Cl au se D. 3 for con d u ctor overl oad protecti on, i t d oes n ot en su re com pl ete protecti on i n al l cases (for exam pl e overl oad wi th cu rren ts l ess th an I2 ), n or wi l l i t n ecessari l y resu l t i n an econ om i cal sol u ti on . Th erefore, su ch a d evi ce can be u n su i tabl e wh ere overl oad s wi th cu rren ts l ess th an I2 are l i kel y to occu r. D.4 Overcurrent protection of conductors Al l cond uctors are requ ired to be protected against overcurren t (see 7. 2) by protective d evices inserted in al l live conductors so that any short-circuit current flowing in the cabl e is interrupted before the con ductor has reached the maximu m al lowable temperature. N OTE I n formati on on n eu tral con d u ctors can be fou n d i n 7. 2. 3, thi rd parag raph . Table D.5 – Maximum allowable conductor temperatures under normal and short-circuit conditions Type of insul ation Maximum temperature u nder normal condi tions U l ti mate short-ti me condu ctor temperature under short-circu it condi tions a) °C °C Pol yvi n yl chl ori d e (PVC) 70 1 60 Ru bber 60 200 Cross-l i nked pol yeth yl en e (XLPE) 90 250 Eth yl en e propyl en e com pou n d (EPR) 90 250 Si l i con e ru bber (Si R) 1 80 350 N OTE For u l ti m ate sh ort-ti me cond u ctor tem peratu res g reater th an 200 ° C, n ei ther ti n n ed n or bare copper con d u ctors are su i tabl e. Si l ver-pl ated or n ickel -pl ated copper cond u ctors are su i tabl e for u se above 200 ° C. http://www.china-gauges.com/ a) Th ese val u es are based on the assu mpti on of ad i abati c behavi ou r for a peri od of n ot more th an 5 s. I n practice, the req uirements of 7. 2 are fu lfil led when the protective d evice at a curren t I causes the in terru ption of the circu it within a time that in no case exceeds the time t where t < 5 s. The value of the time t in seconds can be calcu lated using the fol lowing formu la: t = (k × S/ I) 2 where: S is the cross-sectional area in squ are millimetres; I is the effective short-circu it curren t in amperes expressed for AC as the r. m. s. value; k is the factor shown for copper con ductors when insulated with the fol lowin g material : PVC 115 BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 118 – Ru bber SiR XLPE EPR D.5 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 1 41 1 32 1 43 1 43 Effect of harmonic currents on balanced three-phase systems I n case of circu its feeding single phase loads with load cu rren t includ in g harmon ics, the n eu tral cond uctor of the circuit might be add ition all y loaded and a red uction of the curren t carrying capacity of that cable might be necessary. For reference see I EC 60364-5-52: 2009, Annex E. http://www.china-gauges.com/ BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 – 119 – Annex E (informative) Explanation of emergency operation functions N OTE Th e con cepts bel ow are i n cl u d ed h ere to g i ve th e read er an u n d erstan d i ng of th ese terms even th ou g h i n th i s part of I EC 60204 onl y two of th em are u sed . • Emergency operation Emergency operation includes separatel y or in combin ation : – emergency stop; – emergency start; – emergency switching off; – emergency switching on. • Emergency stop An emergency operation in ten ded to stop a process or a movement that has become hazardous. • Emergency start An emergency operation in tend ed to start a process or a movemen t to remove or to avoid a hazardous situation. • Emergency switching off An emergency operation in tended to switch off the su ppl y of electrical en ergy to al l or a part of an installation where a risk of electric shock or another risk of electrical origin is in vol ved . • Emergency switching on An emergency operation in tended to switch on the suppl y of electrical en ergy to a part of an install ation that is in ten ded to be used for emergency situations . http://www.china-gauges.com/ BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 1 20 – I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 Annex F (informative) Guide for the use of this part of IEC 60204 This part of I EC 60204 gives a large n umber of general req uiremen ts that may or may n ot be applicable to the electrical eq uipmen t of a particu lar machin e. A simpl e reference withou t any q ualification to the complete stan dard I EC 60204-1 is therefore not sufficient. Choices need to be made to cover all requ iremen ts of this part of I EC 60204. A technical committee preparin g a product famil y or a ded icated product stand ard (type C in I SO and CEN ), and the su pplier of a machin e for which no product famil y or dedicated product standard exists, should use this part of I EC 60204: a) by reference; and b) by selection of the most appropriate option(s) from the requiremen ts given in the relevan t clauses; an d c) by mod ification of certain cl auses, as n ecessary, where the particul ar requ irements for the equ ipmen t of the machine are adequatel y covered by other relevant stan dards, provid ing the options selected an d the modifications mad e do not ad versel y affect the level of protection req uired for that machine accordin g to the risk assessmen t. When appl yin g the three principles a), b) and c) listed above, it is recommended that: – reference be mad e to the rel evant clauses an d subclauses of this standard: • that are complied with, ind icatin g where relevan t the appl icable option ; that have been mod ified or extended for the specific machine or equ ipmen t requ iremen ts; and reference be made directly to the relevan t standard , for those req uirements for the electrical equ ipmen t that are adeq uatel y covered by that stand ard . • – Specific expertise can be necessary to: – – – – – perform the n ecessary risk assessmen t of the machine; read and und erstand al l of the requiremen ts of this part of I EC 60204; choose the applicable requ irements from this part of I EC 60204 where al tern atives are given ; http://www.china-gauges.com/ iden tify alternative or add itional particu lar req uiremen ts that differ from or are n ot incl ud ed in the req uirements of this part of I EC 60204, and that are determin ed by the machin e and its use; and specify precisel y those particular requ irements. Figure 1 of this part of I EC 60204 is a bl ock d iagram of a typical machine and can be used as the starting poin t of this task. I t ind icates the Clauses an d Subclauses d eal ing with particul ar requiremen ts/equ ipmen t. H owever, this part of I EC 60204 is a complex documen t and Table F. 1 can help id en tify the appl ication options for a particu lar machine an d gives reference to other relevan t stand ards. BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 – 1 21 – Table F.1 – Application options Subj ect Clause or Subcl ause Scope 1 Gen eral req u i remen ts 4 Sel ecti on of eq u i pm en t 4. 2. 2 Su ppl y d i scon necti n g (i sol ati ng ) d evi ce i) ii) X X X I SO 1 21 00 X X I EC 61 439 seri es X I SO 1 21 00 X 5. 3. 5 X 5. 4, 5. 5 an d 5. 6 X 6 X Em erg ency operati ons 9. 2. 3. 4 X Two-h an d con trol 9. 2. 3. 8 X X Cabl el ess con trol 9. 2. 4 X X Preven ti on of u nexpected start-u p, i sol ation Protecti on ag ai nst el ectri c sh ock i v) X 5. 3 Excepted ci rcu i ts iii ) X X I SO 1 41 1 8 I EC 60364-4-41 X I SO 1 3850 I SO 1 3851 X Con trol fu ncti on s i n th e even t of fai l u re I EC 62745 I SO 1 21 00 9. 4 X X X I SO 1 3849 (al l parts) I EC 62061 Posi ti on sen sors 1 0. 1 . 4 X X Col ou rs an d marki n gs of operator i n terface d evi ces 1 0. 2, 1 0. 3 an d 1 0. 4 X X Em erg ency stop 9. 2. 3. 4. 2 X Em erg ency stop d evi ces 1 0. 7 X X I EC 60947-5-5 Em erg ency swi tchi n g off d evices 1 0. 8 X X I EC 60364-5-53 Con trol g ear – protecti on ag ai nst i n g ress of con tam i nan ts, etc. 1 0. 1 . 3 an d 1 1 .3 X X 1 3. 2 X X 18 X X X X X I d en ti fi cati on of cond u ctors Veri fi cati on Ad d i ti on al u ser req u i rem ents An n ex B Fau l t protecti on i n TN systems An n ex A (A. 1 ) X An n ex A (A. 2) X Fau l t protecti on i n TT systems X I SO 1 41 1 9 I EC 60073 I EC 61 31 0 (al l parts) I SO 1 3850 X I EC 60529 I EC 62491 I EC 60364-6 I EC 60364-4-41 I EC 60364-6 I EC 60364-4-41 http://www.china-gauges.com/ I EC 60364-6 Cl au ses an d Su bcl au ses of th i s part of I EC 60204 where acti on sh ou l d be con si d ered (sh own by X) wi th respect to: i) sel ecti on from th e m easu res gi ven ; i i ) ad d iti on al req u i rem en ts; i i i ) d i fferen t req ui rem en ts; i v) exam pl es of oth er stan d ard s th at can be rel evan t. BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 1 22 – I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 Annex G (informative) Comparison of typical conductor cross-sectional areas Table G. 1 provides a comparison of the cond uctor cross-section al areas of the American Wire Gauge (AWG) with square mill imetres, sq uare inches, an d circul ar mils. Table G.1 – Comparison of conductor sizes Wire size Gauge No mm2 (AWG) 0, 2 24 0, 3 22 0, 5 20 0, 75 18 1 ,0 16 1 ,5 14 2, 5 12 4 10 6 8 10 6 16 4 25 2 35 1 50 Cross-sectional area DC resistance of copper at 20 ºC Circular mils mm2 i nch es 2 Oh m s per km 0, 1 96 0, 000 304 91 , 62 387 0, 205 0, 000 31 7 87, 60 404 0, 283 0, 000 438 63, 46 558 0, 324 0, 000 504 55, 44 640 0, 500 0, 000 775 36, 70 987 0, 51 9 0, 000 802 34, 45 1 020 0, 750 0, 001 1 62 24, 80 1 480 0, 823 0, 001 272 20, 95 1 620 1 , 000 0, 001 550 1 8, 20 1 973 1 , 31 0, 002 026 1 3, 1 9 2 580 1 , 500 0, 002 325 1 2, 20 2 960 2, 08 0, 003 228 8, 442 4 110 2, 500 0, 003 875 7, 56 4 934 3, 31 0, 005 1 29 5, 31 5 6 530 4, 000 0, 006 200 4, 700 7 894 5, 26 0, 008 1 52 3, 335 1 0 380 6, 000 0, 009 300 3, 1 1 0 1 1 841 8, 37 0, 01 2 967 1 0, 000 0, 001 550 1 , 840 1 9 735 1 3, 3 0, 020 61 0 1 , 320 26 240 1 6, 000 0, 024 800 1 , 1 60 31 576 21 , 1 0, 032 780 0, 829 5 41 740 25, 000 0, 038 800 0, 734 0 49 338 33, 6 0, 052 1 00 0, 521 1 66 360 35, 000 0, 054 200 0, 529 0 69 073 42, 4 0, 065 700 0, 41 3 9 83 690 47, 000 0, 072 800 0, 391 0 92 756 http://www.china-gauges.com/ 2, 093 1 6 51 0 The resistance for temperatures other than 20°C can be found using the formu la: BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 – 1 23 – R = R1 [1 + 0, 003 93 ( t – 20)] where: R1 is the resistance at 20 °C; R is the resistance at a temperature t°C. http://www.china-gauges.com/ BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 1 24 – I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 Annex H (informative) Measures to reduce the effects of electromagnetic influences H.1 Definitions For the purposes of Annex H on ly, the followin g terms and d efinitions apply. H.1 .1 apparatus fin ished device or combination thereof made commercially available as a single fu nctional u nit, in ten ded for the end user and l iable to generate electromagn etic d istu rbance, or the performance of which is liable to be affected by such disturbance H.1 .2 fixed installation particu lar combination of several types of apparatus and , where appl icabl e, other devices, which are assembled , installed and intended to be used perman en tly at a predefined location H.2 General This Annex H provides recommendations to improve electromagnetic immu nity and reduce emission of electromagnetic distu rbances. For EM C purposes, electrical equ ipmen t for machin ery is deemed to be either apparatus or fixed instal lations. Where electrical safety an d electromagn etic compatibility resul t in d ifferen t requiremen ts, electrical safety always has the higher priority. El ectromagnetic I n terference (EM I ) can d istu rb or damage process mon itoring, con trol and au tomation systems. Currents d ue to l ightning, switching operations, short-circu its an d other electromagnetic phen omena can cause overvol tages an d electromagnetic in terference. These effects can occur for example: • where large conductive loops exist, • where differen t electrical wirin g systems are instal led in common rou tes, e. g. power su ppl y, communication , con trol or signal cables. http://www.china-gauges.com/ Cables carrying large cu rren ts with a high rate of change of current (d i/d t) can in duce overvol tages in other cables, which can influ ence or damage the connected electrical equipmen t. H.3 H.3.1 Mitigation of electromagnetic interference (EMI) General Consideration shou ld be given , in the d esign of the electrical eq uipment to the measures d escribed below for reducin g the electromagnetic in fluences on electrical eq uipmen t. Onl y el ectrical equ ipment which meets the requ iremen ts of the appropriate EMC standards, or the EM C requ iremen ts of the relevan t prod uct standard , should be used . BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 H.3.2 – 1 25 – Measures to reduce EMI The fol lowing measures reduce electromagnetic in terference: a) The install ation of surge protection d evices an d /or filters for equ ipment sensitive to electromagnetic in fl uences is recommen ded to improve electromagnetic compatibil ity with regard to con ducted electromagnetic phen omena; b) Conductive sheaths (e. g. armouring, screens) of cables shoul d be bond ed to the protective bonding circuit; c) I n ductive l oops shoul d be avoid ed by selection of common rou tes for power, signal an d d ata circu its wiring while maintain in g circu it separation in accordance with Clause H . 4; d) Power cables shou ld be kept separate from signal or d ata cabl es; e) Where it is n ecessary for power and sign al or data cables to cross each other they shou l d be crossed at right-angles; f) U se of cables with concen tric con ductors to red uce currents in duced in to the protective conductor; g) U se of symmetrical mu lticore cables (e. g. screen ed cables con taining separate protective conductors) for the electrical con nections between motors and con verters; h) U se of signal an d d ata cabl es according to the EM C requ iremen ts of the man u factu rer’s instructions; i) Where screened signal or data cables are used, care shou ld be taken to red uce curren t fl owing through the screens of signal cabl es, or d ata cables, which are earthed. I t can be n ecessary to instal l a by-pass conductor; see Figure H . 1 ; I By-pass con d u ctor for screen rei n forcem en t IEC Figure H.1 – By-pass conductor for screen reinforcement N OTE A g ood eq u i poten ti al bon d i ng of th e com pon ents of th e m achi n e red u ces the n eed for by-pass cond u ctors. Eq uipoten tial bond in g connections shou ld have an impedance http://www.china-gauges.com/ as low as practicabl e by being as short as practicabl e an d where appl icable braided to conduct higher frequ encies; k) I f electron ic equ ipment requ ires a reference voltage at abou t earth poten tial in order to fu nction correctl y; this reference vol tage is provid ed by the fu nctional earthing conductor. For equ ipmen t operating at high frequencies, the connections shall be kept as short as practicable. j) H.4 Separation and segregation of cables Power cables an d data cabl es which share the same rou te shou ld be instal led according to the requ iremen ts of this Annex H . Where no other in formation is availabl e, then the cable separation distance between the power and data cables shou ld be in accord ance with Table H . 1 and Figure H . 2. BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 1 26 – I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 Table H.1 – Minimum separation distances using metallic containment as illustrated in Figure H.2 Separation wi thout metal lic contai nment A B C Mesh metalli c contai nment Perforated metalli c containment Soli d metallic containment IEC ≥ 200 m m ≥ 1 50 m m IEC IEC ≥ 1 00 m m 0 mm A Screen i ng performan ce (DC-1 00 M H z) eq u i val ent to wel d ed m esh steel basket of m esh si ze 50 m m × 1 00 mm (excl u d i n g l ad d ers). Th is screen i ng performan ce i s al so achi eved wi th steel tray even i f th e wal l thi ckness i s l ess th an 1 mm an d /or th e evenl y d i stri bu ted perforated area i s g reater than 20 %. B Screen i ng performan ce (DC-1 00 M H z) eq u i val ent to steel tray of at l east 1 m m wal l thi ckness an d n o m ore th an 20 % evenl y d i stri bu ted perforated area. Th i s screen i ng performan ce i s al so achi eved wi th screened power cabl es. N o part of th e cabl e wi th i n th e m etal l i c con tai n m en t sh ou l d be l ess than 1 0 m m bel ow th e top of th e m etal l i c con tai nm en t. C Screen i ng performan ce (DC-1 00 M H z) eq u i val ent to a steel con d u i t of at l east 1 m m wal l th i ckness. Separati on speci fi ed i s i n ad d i ti on to th at provi d ed by an y d i vi d er/screen . The min imum separation requiremen t specified in Tabl e H . 1 appl ies to the horizon tal or vertical separation between ad jacen t cable trays or cable trunkin g systems. Where data cabl es and power supply cables are required to cross and required minimu m separation cannot be main tained then the angl e of their crossing shou ld be main tained at 90 d egrees on either sid e of the crossing for a d istance no less than the applicable minimum separation requiremen t. Figures H . 2 and H . 3 show examples of separation and segregation . http://www.china-gauges.com/ BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 – 1 27 – IEC For d i stan ces see Tabl e H . 1 . = power su ppl y cabl i n g = au xi l i ary ci rcu i ts = d ata cabl i n g = sen si ti ve ci rcu i ts (e. g . m easu rem en t) Figu re H .2 – Examples of vertical separation and segregation IEC For d i stan ces see Tabl e H . 1 . Figure H .3 – Examples of horizontal separation and segregation U sabl e space within the cable tray or cabl e tru nking system should al low for an agreed http://www.china-gauges.com/ q uan tity of ad ditional cables to be installed (see Annex B). The cable bun dl e height should be lower than the side-walls of the cabl e tray or cable trunkin g system, as shown in Figure H . 4 bel ow. The overlapping lid of cable trunkin g systems improves the electromagnetic compatibil ity performance. For a U -shape cable tray, the magnetic field decreases near the two corn ers. For this reason , deep side-wal ls are preferred . BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 1 28 – I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 Sh ad i n g i n d i cates screeni n g performan ce Sh ad i n g i n d i cates screeni n g performan ce N ot recom m end ed N ot recom m end ed Recomm en d ed Recomm en d ed IEC Figu re H .4 – Cable arrangements in metal cable trays M etal cable trays or cable trunkin g systems which are in tended to provid e electromagnetic compatibil ity shall always be connected to the l ocal equipoten tial bond in g system at both ends. For l ong d istances, for example greater than 50 m, addition al connections to the equ ipotential bon ding system are recommend ed. Al l conn ections to the eq uipotential bondin g system shoul d have low impedance. Where metal cable trays or cable trunking systems are constructed from several elemen ts, care shou ld be taken to ensure con tinuity by effective bonding between ad jacen t elemen ts. The shape of the metal lic section should achieve con tinu ity of shieldin g throu ghou t its length. All in tercon nections should have low impedance; see Figure H . 5. a N on -conformant IEC http://www.china-gauges.com/ b Con formant IEC c Recomm en d ed IEC Figu re H .5 – Connections between metal cable trays or cable trunking systems Where metal l ic covers for metall ic cable tru nking systems are used, a cover over the full l en gth is preferred . I f that is n ot possible, the covers should be connected to the cable tray at l east at both ends by short connections l ess than 1 0 cm, e. g. braided or mesh straps. BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 – 1 29 – Figure H . 6 shows a metal cabl e tray crossing a wal l at which a fire barrier is to be installed . Where metal cable trays are req u ired to be interrupted to pass through bu ild ing structures, a low imped ance in tercon nection should be provid ed between the two metal lic sections. Regulations with respect to fire barriers take precedence over EMC considerations. A N on -conformant B Con formant IEC Figure H.6 – Interruption of metal cable trays at fire barriers H.5 Power supply of a machine by parallel sources Where a machin e is supplied with power by parallel sou rces, see I EC 60364-1 . H.6 Supply impedance where a Power Drive System (PDS) is used Connection of a PDS to too high a su ppl y source impedance can lead to cond ucted emission problems. http://www.china-gauges.com/ BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 1 30 – I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 Annex I (informative) Documentation / Information A list of available standards appl icabl e to d ocumen tation and in formation is provided in Table I . 1 . Brief definitions of a set of in ternation al ly standard ized docu men t kin ds are given in the publicl y available database I EC 61 355 DB (http: //std . iec. ch/iec61 355). Table I.1 – Documentation / Information that can be applicable Type of information for the electrical equipment Stru ctu ri n g pri nci pl es Stru ctu ri n g of d ocu m en ts Parts l i st Li st of d ocu m en ts Speci fi cati on of th e properti es of th e el ectri cal eq u i pm en t I n structi on s for h an d l i n g , tran sportati on an d storage I n structi on s for i nstal l ati on , erecti on, assem bl i n g on si te, d i sm an tl i n g , etc. I n structi on s for u se I n structi on s for servi ce an d mai n ten ance Referen ce d esi g n ati on s Recommended standard Industrial systems, installations and equipment and industrial products – Structuring principles and reference designations – Part 1: Basic rules I EC 62023: Structuring of technical information and documentation (see note) I EC 62027: Preparation of object lists, including parts lists I EC 62027: Preparation of object lists, including parts lists I EC PAS 62569-1 : Generic specification of information on products – Part 1: Principles and methods I EC 82079-1 : Preparation of instructions for use – Structuring, content and presentation – Part 1: General principles and detailed requirements I EC 82079-1 : Preparation of instructions for use – Structuring, content and presentation – Part 1: General principles and detailed requirements I EC 82079-1 : Preparation of instructions for use – Structuring, content and presentation – Part 1: General principles and detailed requirements I EC 82079-1 : Preparation of instructions for use – Structuring, content and presentation – Part 1: General principles and detailed requirements I EC 81 346-1 : Industrial systems, installations and equipment and industrial products – Structuring principles and reference designations – Part 1: Basic rules I EC 81 346-1 : an d http://www.china-gauges.com/ Spare parts l i st for a speci fi ed peri od Industrial systems, installations and equipment and industrial products – Structuring principles and reference designations – Part 2: Classification of objects and codes for classes I EC 61 666: Industrial systems, installations and equipment and industrial products – Identification of terminals within a system I EC 62491 : Industrial systems, installations and equipment and industrial products – Labelling of cables and cores I EC 61 082-1 : Preparation of documents used in electrotechnology – Part 1: Rules I EC 61 082-1 : Preparation of documents used in electrotechnology – Part 1: Rules I EC 61 082-1 : Preparation of documents used in electrotechnology – Part 1: Rules I EC 62027: Preparation of object lists, including parts lists Li st of param eters (e. g . of converters) (N o stan d ard exi sts) Termi n al d esi gn ati on s Desi gn ati on s of cabl es an d cores Ci rcu it d i ag rams Layou t of eq u i pm en t an d overal l d i m ensi ons I n tercon n ecti on d i ag ram , termin al l i st, cabl e l i st, cabl e tray l ayou t I EC 81 346-2: BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 – 1 31 – Type of i nformation for the electrical equi pment Li st of tool s I d en ti fi cati on system s Recommended standard Preparation of instructions for use – Structuring, content and presentation – Part 1: General principles and detailed requirements I EC 62507-1 : Identification systems enabling unambiguous information interchange – Requirements – Part 1: Principles and methods I EC 82079: N OTE For si mpl e eq u i pm ent I EC 62023 al l ows al l i n formati on to be con tai n ed wi thi n on e si n g l e d ocu men t. http://www.china-gauges.com/ BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 1 32 – I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 Bibliography IEC 60034-5, Rotating electrical machines – Part 5: Degrees of protection provided by the integral Rotating electrical machines – Part 11: Thermal protection IEC standard voltages design of rotating electrical machines (IP code) – Classifcation NOTE Harmonized as EN 60034-5. IEC 60034-1 1 , NOTE Harmonized as EN 60034-1 1 . IEC 60038:2009, NOTE Harmonized as EN 60038:2011 (modi f ed). IEC 60050, International Electrotechnical Vocabulary (available at <http://www.electropedia.org>) IEC 60073:2002, Basic and safety principles for man-machine interface, marking and identifcation – Coding principles for indicators and actuators NOTE Harmonized as EN 60073:2002 (not modi f ed). IEC 60085, NOTE Electrical insulation – Thermal evaluation and designation Harmonized as EN 60085. IEC 60204-1 1 :2000, Safety of machinery – Electrical equipment of machines – Part 11: Requirements for HV equipment for voltages above 1 000 V a.c. or 1 500 V d.c. and not exceeding 36 kV NOTE Harmonized as EN 60204-1 1 :2000 Safety of machinery – Electrical equipment of machines – Part 31: Particular safety and EMC requirements for sewing machines, units and systems IEC 60204-31 :201 3, NOTE Harmonized as EN 60204-31 :201 3 (not modi f ed). IEC 60204-32:2008, Safety of machinery – Electrical equipment of machines – Part 32: Requirements for hoisting machines NOTE Harmonized as EN 60204-32:2008 (not modi f ed). IEC 60204-33:2009, Safety of machinery – Electrical equipment of machines – Part 33: Requirements for semiconductor fabrication equipment IEC 6021 6 (all parts), Electrical insulating materials – Thermal endurance properties Conductors of insulated cables http://www.china-gauges.com/ Low-voltage fuses – Part 1: General requirements IEC 60287 (all parts), Electric cables – Calculation of the current rating NOTE Harmonized as EN 60204-33:2011 (modi f ed). NOTE Harmonized in EN 6021 6 series. IEC 60228:2004, NOTE Harmonized as EN 60228:2005 (not modi f ed). IEC 60269-1 :2006, NOTE Harmonized as EN 60269-1 :2007 (not modi f ed). IEC 60320-1 , quirements Appliance couplers for household and similar general purposes –Part 1: General re- IEC 60332 (all parts), Tests on electric and optical bre cables under re conditions IEC 60335 (all parts), Household and similar electrical appliances – Safety IEC 60364 (all parts), Low-voltage electrical installations Basic and safety principles for man-machine interface, marking and identi cation – Actuating principles NOTE Harmonized as EN 60320-1 . f NOTE Harmonized in EN 60332 series. NOTE Harmonized in EN 60335 series. NOTE Harmonized in HD 60364 series. IEC 60447:2004, NOTE Harmonized as EN 60447:2004 (not modi f ed). f f BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 – 1 33 – General requirements for residual current operated protective devices IEC 60757:1 983, Code for designation of colours IEC TR 60755, NOTE Harmonized as HD 457 S1 :1 985 (not modi f ed). IEC TR 60890, A method of temperature-rise verifcation of low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies by calculation NOTE Harmonized as CLC/TR 60890. IEC 60909-0:2001 , NOTE Short-circuit currents in three-phase a.c. systems – Part 0: Calculation of currents Harmonized as EN 60909-0:2001 (not modi f ed). IEC TR 60909-1 :2002, Short-circuit currents in three-phase a.c. systems – Part 1: Factors for the calculation of short-circuit currents according to IEC 60909-0 IEC 60947-1 :2007, Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 1: General rules NOTE Harmonized as EN 60947-1 :2007 (not modi f ed). Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 4-1: Contactors and motorstarters – Electromechanical contactors and motor-starters IEC 60947-4-1 , NOTE Harmonized as EN 60947-4-1 . IEC 60947-5-2:2007, Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 5-2: Control circuit devices and switching elements – Proximity switches NOTE Harmonized as EN 60947-5-2:2007 (not modi f ed). IEC 60947-5-8, Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 5-8: Control circuit devices and switching elements – Three-position enabling switches NOTE Harmonized as EN 60947-5-8. IEC 60947-7-1 :2009, Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Part 7-1: Ancillary equipment – Terminal blocks for copper conductors NOTE Harmonized as EN 60947-7-1 :2009 (not modi f ed). Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Part 5: Installation and mitigation guidelines – Section 2: Earthing and cabling IEC 61 000-6-1 :2005, Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Part 6-1: Generic standards: Immunity for residential, commercial and light-industrial environments IEC 61 000-5-2:1 997, NOTE Harmonized as EN 61 000-6-1 :2007 (not modi f ed). IEC 61 000-6-2:2005, Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Part 6-2: Generic standards – Immunity for industrial environments http://www.china-gauges.com/ NOTE Harmonized as EN 61 000-6-2:2005 (not modi f ed). IEC 61 000-6-3:2006, E lectromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Part 6-3: Generic standards – Emission standard for residential, commercial and light-industrial environments NOTE Harmonized as EN 61 000-6-3:2007 (not modi f ed). IEC 61 000-6-4:1 997, Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Part 6: Generic standards – Section 4: Emission standard for industrial environments NOTE IEC 61 082-1 :201 4, NOTE Preparation of documents used in electrotechnology – Part 1: Rules Harmonized as EN 61 000-6-4:2001 2 (modi f ed). Harmonized as EN 61 082-1 :201 5 (not modi f ed). IEC 61 084 (all parts), Cable trunking and ducting systems for electrical installations ___________ 2 Superseded by EN 61 000-6-4:2007, which is based on IEC 61 000-6-4:2006. BS EN 60204‑1:2018 – 1 34 – I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 IEC 61 1 75, Industrial systems, installations and equipment and industrial products –Designation of signals IEC 61 1 80 (all parts), NOTE Harmonized as EN 61 1 75. High-voltage test techniques for low-voltage equipment NOTE Harmonized in EN 61 1 80 series. IEC TR 61 200-53:1 994, Electrical installation guide – Part 53: Selection and erection of electrical equipment – Switchgear and controlgear IEC 61 355, Collection of standardized and established document kinds (available at http://std.iec.ch/ iec61 355) IEC 61 496-1 :2004, Safety of machinery – Electro-sensitive protective equipment – Part 1: General requirements and tests NOTE Harmonized as EN 61 496-1 :2004 3 (modi f ed). IEC 61 506, Industrial-process measurement and control – Documentation of application software IEC 61 557 (all parts), Electrical safety in low voltage distribution systems up to 1 000 V a. c. and 1500 V d. c. – Equipment for testing, measuring or monitoring of protective measures NOTE Harmonized in EN 61 557 series. IEC 61 558-2-2, Safety of power transformers, power supplies, reactors and similar products – Part 2-2: Particular requirements and tests for control transformers and power supplies incorporating control transformers NOTE Harmonized as EN 61 558-2-2. IEC 61 558-2-1 6, Safety of transformers, reactors, power supply units and similar products for supply voltages up to 1 100 V – Part 2-16: Particular requirements and tests for switch mode power supply units and transformers for switch mode power supply units NOTE Harmonized as EN 61 558-2-1 6. IEC 61 643-1 2:2008, Low-voltage surge protective devices – Part 12: Surge protective devices connected to low-voltage power distribution systems – Selection and application principles NOTE Harmonized as CLC/TS 61 643-1 2:2009 (modi f ed). IEC 61 666, Industrial systems, installations and equipment and industrial products – Identifcation of terminals within a system IEC 61 800 (all parts), NOTE NOTE Harmonized as EN 61 666. Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Harmonized in EN 61 800 series. http://www.china-gauges.com/ IEC TR 61 91 2-1 :2007, Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Overcurrent protective devices – Part 1: Application of short-circuit ratings IEC 62020, Electrical accessories – Residual current monitors for household and similar uses (RCMs) NOTE Harmonized as EN 62020. IEC 62027:201 1 , Preparation of object lists, including parts lists NOTE Harmonized as EN 62027:201 2 (not modi f ed). IEC 62305-1 :201 0, Protection against lightning – Part 1: General principles NOTE Harmonized as EN 62305-1 :201 1 (modi f ed). IEC 62305-4:201 0, Protection against lightning – Part 4: Electrical and electronic systems within structures NOTE Harmonized as EN 62305-4:2011 (modi f ed). IEC 62491 , Industrial systems, installations and equipment and industrial products – Labelling of cables and cores NOTE Harmonized as EN 62491 . ___________ 3 Superseded by EN 61 496-1 :201 3, which is based on IEC 61 496-1 :201 2. BS EN 60204‑1:2018 I EC 60204-1 : 201 6 © I EC 201 6 – 1 35 – IEC 62507-1 , Identifcation systems enabling unambiguous information interchange – Requirements – Part 1: Principles and methods NOTE IEC 62745 , 4 NOTE Safety of machinery – Requirements for the interfacing of cableless controllers to machinery Harmonized as EN 62507-1 . Harmonized as EN 62745. IEC PAS 62569-1 , Generic specifcation of information on products – Part 1: Principles and methods IEC 81 346-1 :2009, Industrial systems, installations and equipment and industrial products – Structuring principles and reference designations – Part 1: Basic rules NOTE Harmonized as EN 81 346-1 :2009 (not modi f ed). IEC 81 346-2:2009, Industrial systems, installations and equipment and industrial products – Struc- turing principles and reference designations – Part 2: Classifcation of objects and codes for classes NOTE Harmonized as EN 81 346-2:2009 (not modi f ed). IEC 82079-1 :201 2, Preparation of instructions for use – Structuring, content and presentation – Part 1: General principles and detailed requirements NOTE Harmonized as EN 82079-1 :201 2 (not modi f ed). IEC Guide 1 06:1 996, Guide for specifying environmental conditions for equipment performance rating ISO 3864-1 :201 1 , Graphical symbols – Safety colours and safety signs – Part 1: Design principles for safety signs and safety markings ISO 7000:201 4, Graphical symbols for use on equipment – Registered symbols ISO 1 21 00:201 0, Safety of machinery – General principles for design – Risk assessment and risk reduction NOTE Harmonized as EN ISO 1 21 00:201 0 (not modi f ed). Ergonomics of the thermal environment – Methods for the assessment of human responses to contact with surfaces – Part 1:Hot surfaces ISO 1 3732-1 , NOTE Harmonized as EN ISO 1 3732-1 . ISO 1 3851 :2002, principles Safety of machinery – Two-hand control devices – Functional aspects and design ISO 1 41 1 8:2000, Safety of machinery – Prevention of unexpected start-up ISO 1 41 22-1 :2001 , Safety of machinery – Permanent means of access to machinery – Part 1: Choice of fxed means of access between two levels ISO 1 41 22-1 :2001 /AMD1 :201 0 http://www.china-gauges.com/ Safety of machinery – Permanent means of access to machinery – Part 2: Working platforms and walkways ISO 1 41 22-2:2001 , ISO 1 41 22-2:2001 /AMD1 :201 0 ISO 1 41 22-3:2001 , Safety of machinery – Permanent means of access to machinery – Part 3: Stairs, stepladders and guard-rails ISO 1 41 22-3:2001 /AMD1 :201 0 Guide to use of low-voltage harmonized cables EN 501 60:201 0, Voltage characteristics of electricity supplied by public electricity networks CENELEC HD 51 6 S2, EN 501 60:201 0/AMD1 :201 5 UL 508A, UL Standard for Safety for Industrial Control Panels, second Edition, 201 3 revised 201 4. NFPA 79, Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery, 201 5 edition. ___________ ___________ 4 Under consideration. NO COPYING WITHOUT BSI PERMISSION EXCEPT AS PERMITTED BY COPYRIGHT LAW British Standards Institution (BSI) BSI is the national body responsible for preparing British Standards and other standards-related publications, information and services. BSI is incorporated by Royal Charter. British Standards and other standardization products are published by BSI Standards Limited. About us Reproducing extracts We bring together business, industry, government, consumers, innovators and others to shape their combined experience and expertise into standards -based solutions. For permission to reproduce content from BSI publications contact the BSI Copyright & Licensing team. The knowledge embodied in our standards has been carefully assembled in a dependable format and ref ned through our open consultation process. Organizations of all sizes and across all sectors choose standards to help them achieve their goals. Information on standards We can provide you with the knowledge that your organization needs to succeed. Find out more about British Standards by visiting our website at bsigroup.com/standards or contacting our Customer Services team or Knowledge Centre. Buying standards You can buy and download PDF versions of BSI publications, including British and adopted European and international standards, through our website at bsigroup.com/shop, where hard copies can also be purchased. If you need international and foreign standards from other Standards Development Organizations, hard copies can be ordered from our Customer Services team. Copyright in BSI publications All the content in BSI publications, including British Standards, is the property of and copyrighted by BSI or some person or entity that owns copyright in the information used (such as the international standardization bodies) and has formally licensed such information to BSI for commercial publication and use. Save for the provisions below, you may not transfer, share or disseminate any portion of the standard to any other person. You may not adapt, distribute, commercially exploit, or publicly display the standard or any portion thereof in any manner whatsoever without BSI’s prior written consent. Storing and using standards Standards purchased in soft copy format: • A British Standard purchased in soft copy format is licensed to a sole named user for personal or internal company use only. • The standard may be stored on more than 1 device provided that it is accessible by the sole named user only and that only 1 copy is accessed at any one time. • A single paper copy may be printed for personal or internal company use only. • Standards purchased in hard copy format: • A British Standard purchased in hard copy format is for personal or internal company use only. • It may not be further reproduced – in any format – to create an additional copy. This includes scanning of the document. If you need more than 1 copy of the document, or if you wish to share the document on an internal network, you can save money by choosing a subscription product (see ‘Subscriptions’). Subscriptions Our range of subscription services are designed to make using standards easier for you. For further information on our subscription products go to bsigroup.com/subscriptions. With British Standards Online (BSOL) you’ll have instant access to over 55,000 British and adopted European and international standards from your desktop. It’s available 24/7 and is refreshed daily so you’ll always be up to date. You can keep in touch with standards developments and receive substantial discounts on the purchase price of standards, both in single copy and subscription format, by becoming a BSI Subscribing Member. PLUS is an updating service exclusive to BSI Subscribing Members. You will automatically receive the latest hard copy of your standards when they’re revised or replaced. To f nd out more about becoming a BSI Subscribing Member and the benef ts of membership, please visit bsigroup.com/shop. With a Multi-User Network Licence (MUNL) you are able to host standards publications on your intranet. Licences can cover as few or as many users as you wish. With updates supplied as soon as they’re available, you can be sure your documentation is current. For further information, email subscriptions@bsigroup.com. Revisions Our British Standards and other publications are updated by amendment or revision. We continually improve the quality of our products and services to benef t your business. If you f nd an inaccuracy or ambiguity within a British Standard or other BSI publication please inform the Knowledge Centre. Useful Contacts Customer Services http://www.china-gauges.com/ Tel: +44 345 086 9001 Email (orders): orders@bsigroup. com Email (enquiries): cservices@bsigroup. com Subscriptions Tel: +44 345 086 9001 Email: subscriptions@bsigroup. com Knowledge Centre Tel: +44 20 8996 7004 Email: knowledgecentre@bsigroup. com Copyright & Licensing Tel: +44 20 8996 7070 Email: copyright@bsigroup. com BSI Group Headquarters 389 Chiswick High Road London W4 4AL UK This page deliberately left blank
